illinois state university watterson dining expansion project · illinois state university watterson...

BID SET

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY NORMAL, IL

DATED: JULY 1, 2016

PREPARED BY:

CORDOGAN CLARK & ASSOCIATES, INC. 960 RIDGEWAY AVENUE, AURORA, ILLINOIS 60506

BOOK 1 OF 2

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY CORDOGAN, CLARK & ASSOCIATES, INC. WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 960 RIDGEWAY AVENUE NORMAL, ILLINOIS AURORA, ILLINOIS CCA PROJECT NUMBER: 14362 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 01, 2016 TABLE OF CONTENTS: DIVISION 00 00 00 00 SOIL BORING REPORT DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 01 12 00 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 22 00 UNIT PRICES 01 23 00 ALTERNATES 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00a SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00a RFI TEMPLATE 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00a STATEMENT OF LIABILITY LIMITATION FOR ELECTRONIC TRANSFER 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00a SUBMITTALS REPORT 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILTIES AND CONTROLS 01 73 00 EXECUTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 54 16 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 10 00 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 21 00 STEEL JOISTS 05 31 00 STEEL DECK 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 51 13 METAL PAN STAIRS 05 51 19 METAL GRATING STAIRS DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 14 16 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 19 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 21 20 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 07 26 00 VAPOR RETARDERS 07 27 26 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 42 13.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 56 00.11 FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING, CONCRETE DECK 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 81 00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 81 23 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 46 FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANT 07 92 19 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 95 00 EXPANSION CONTROL DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 19 STAINLESS-STEEL DOOR FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 42 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES 08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 88 13 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 05 61.13 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTUAL METAL FRAMING 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE & ACCESSORIES 09 67 23 URETHANE CEMENT MORTAR FLOORING SYSTEM 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 22 39.13 FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS 10 26 00 WALL PROTECTION 10 44 13 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 36 16 METAL COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 24 13 HYDRAULIC FREIGHT ELVATORS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 10 00 WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 14 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 05 15 PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION

22 10 13 FACILITY FUEL PIPING 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 22 14 00 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 22 15 13 GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 15 PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION 23 09 14 ELECTRIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 12 22 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13.13 UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 23 CONDENSATE PUMPS 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 34 00 HVAC FANS 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 23 41 00 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION 23 57 00 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 23 73 23 FACTORY FABRICATED CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 82 00 HEATING AND COOLING TERMINAL UNITS DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 01 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 26 05 01 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 05 13 WIRES AND CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 30 BOXES 26 05 34 RACEWAYS 26 05 73 SHORT CIRCUIT/COORDINATION STUDY AND ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY 26 08 00 SYSTEM TESTING 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROLS

26 12 16 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 20 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 16 DISCONNECTS (BLADE TYPE) 26 29 12 MOTOR STARTERS 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 26 50 00 LIGHTING DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 21 12 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS RACEWAYS DIVISION 28 – SECURITY 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEM DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITES 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE SPECIFIERS: General: Cordogan Clark & Associates, Inc. Attn: Tim Weber Email: [email protected] Ph: 630-896-4678 Heating, Ventilating, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical: Henneman Engineering Attn: William Devine Email: [email protected] Ph: 217-359-1514

SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS: GENERAL T1.0 COVER SHEET T1.1 SHEET INDEX T1.2 GENERAL NOTES T2.0 CONSTRUCTION PHASE COORDINATION TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY 1 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY CIVIL C1.0 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN C2.0 UTILITY PLAN C3.0 SITE LAYOUT & GRADING PLAN C4.0 SITE DETAILS LIFE / SAFETY EP2.1 EGRESS PLAN – LOWER LEVEL EP2.2 EGRESS PLAN – DOCK LEVEL EP2.3 EGRESS PLAN – UPPER LEVEL F1.1 FIREPROOFING – LOWER LEVEL FRAMING PLAN F1.2 FIREPROOFING – UPPER LEVEL FRAMING PLAN ARCHITECTURAL A0.1 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN SCOPE A0.2 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN A1.1 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN A1.2 DOCK LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN A1.3 UPPER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN A1.4 REFLECTED CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN A2.1 LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN A2.2 DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN A2.3 UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN A2.4 PARTITION TYPES AND NOTES A2.5 PARTITION TYPES AND NOTES A2.6 PLAN DETAILS A3.1 LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A3.2 DOCK LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A3.3 UPPER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A4.1 ROOF PLAN A4.1A ROOF PLAN - ALTERNATE A4.2 TYPICAL ROOF DETAILS A5.1 BUILDING ELEVATIONS A5.2 FRAME ELEVATIONS

A6.0 GENERAL SECTION NOTES A6.1 BUILDING SECTIONS A6.2 WALL SECTIONS A6.3 WALL SECTIONS A6.4 WALL SECTIONS A6.5 SECTION DETAILS A6.6 SECTION DETAILS A6.7 SECTION DETAILS A8.1 ELEVATOR SECTIONS AND DETAILS A8.2 ELEVATOR SECTIONS AND DETAILS A8.3 STAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS A8.4 STAIR SECTIONS AND DETAILS A9.0 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS A10.1 DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS A12.1 LOWER LEVEL FLOOR FINISH PLAN A12.2 DOCK LEVEL FLOOR FINISH PLAN A12.3 UPPER LEVEL FLOOR FINISH PLAN A13.1 LOWER LEVEL WALL FINSIH PLAN A13.2 DOCK LEVEL WALL FINISH PLAN A13.3 UPPER LEVEL WALL FINISH PLAN A14.1 FURNITURE PLAN – PRIVATE DINING A14.2 FURNITURE PLAN – LECTURE A14.3 FURNITURE PLAN – PRIVATE BANQUET A14.4 FURNITURE PLAN – OFFICES STRUCTURAL S0.1 EXISTING BUILDING MODIFICATION – FOUNDATION PLAN S0.2 EXISTING BUILDING MODIFICATION – UPPER LEVEL S0.3 EXISTING BUILDING MODIFICATION – SECTIONS AND DETAILS S1.1 FOUNDATION PLAN S1.2 LOWER & DOCK LEVEL PLAN S1.3 UPPER LEVEL FRAMING PLAN S1.4 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.1 BUILDING STRUCTURE SECTIONS S2.2 BUILDING STRUCTURE SECTIONS S2.3 BRACED FRAME AND ROOF SCREEN DETAILS S3.1 BUILDING WALL SECTIONS S3.2 BUILDING WALL SECTIONS S3.3 BUILDING WALL SECTIONS S3.4 BUILDING FRAMING SECTIONS S3.5 BUILDING FRAMING SECTIONS S3.6 BUILDING FRAMING DETAILS S3.7 UPPER LEVEL & ROOF PLAN DETAILS S3.8 JOIST LOADING DIAGRAMS S4.0 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES HEATING H0.0 ELECTRICAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS HD1.0 LOWER LEVEL AND DOCK LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN - HEATING

HD1.1 UPPER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN - HEATING H1.0 CORE AND TOWER PLAN – HEATING ALTERNATE BIDS 002 & 003 H1.1 ENLARGED EXISTING PLANS – HEATING ALTERNATE BIDS 002 & 003 H2.0 LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – HEATING H2.1 DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – HEATING H2.2 UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN – HEATING H2.3 ROOF PLAN – HEATING H2.4 CHILLER PLANT WORK – HEATING ALTERNATE BID 003 H3.0 HEATING DETAILS H3.1 HEATING DETAILS H3.2 HEATING DETAILS H4.0 HEATING ONE LINE – DIAGRAM H5.0 HEATING SCHEDULES VENTILATION V0.0 VENTILATION NOTES AND SYMBOLS VD1.0 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN – VENTILATION V1.0 LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – VENTILATION V1.1 DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – VENTILATION V1.2 UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN – VENTILATION V1.3 ROOF LEVEL NEW PLAN – VENTILATION V1.3A ALTERNATE BID 001 – DX SYSTEM ROOF PLAN - VENTILATION V3.0 VENTILATION DETAILS V3.0A ALTERNATE BID 001 – DX SYSTEM VENTILATION DETAILS V3.1 VENTILATION DETAILS V3.2 VENTILATION DETAILS V5.0 VENTILATION SCHEDULES V5.1 VENTILATION SCHEDULES PLUMBING P0.0 UNDERFLOOR NEW PLAN – PLUMBING PD1.0 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN – PLUMBING PD1.1 DOCK LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN – PLUMBING PD1.2 UPPER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN – PLUMBING P1.0 OVERALL LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – PLUMBING P1.1 OVERALL DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – PLUMBING P1.2 OVERALL UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN – PLUMBING P1.3 ROOF LEVEL NEW PLAN – PLUMBING P2.01 UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P2.02 UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P2.03 UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P2.04 UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P2.05 UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING PLAN P2.06 LOWER LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P2.07 LOWER LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P2.08 DOCK LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P2.09 DOCK LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P2.10 DOCK LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P2.11 UPPER LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN

P2.12 UPPER LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P3.0 PLUMBING ISOMETRICS P3.1 PLUMBING ISOMETRICS P4.0 PLUMBING DETAILS P5.0 PLUMBING SCHEDULES P6.0 PLUMBING NOTES AND SYMBOLS FIRE PROTECTION FP0.0 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL INFORMATION FP1.0 LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – FIRE PROTECTION FP1.1 DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – FIRE PROTECTION FP1.2 UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN – FIRE PROTECTION ELECTRICAL E0.0 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND NOTES ED0.1 SITE PLAN – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ED3.1 DOCK LEVEL – DEMOLITION PLAN ELECTRICAL ED3.2 UPPER LEVEL – DEMOLITION PLAN ELECTRICAL E0.1 SITE NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL E1.0 LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION E1.0A LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION E1.1 DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION E1.1A DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION E1.2 UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION E1.3 ELECTRICAL ROOF PLAN E1.3A ELECTRICAL ROOF PLAN E1.4 ROOF PLAN – LIGHTING PROTECTION E1.4A ROOF PLAN – LIGHTING PROTECTION E1.5 TOWER CORE BASEMENT – PUMP REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL – ALTERNATE BID NO. 003 E2.0 LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT OVERALL PLAN – ELECTRICAL E2.0.A LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT OVERALL PLAN – ELECTRICAL – ALTERNATE BID 001 E2.0A LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMNET A – ELECTRICAL E2.0B LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMNET B – ELECTRICAL E2.0B.A LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMNET B – ELECTRICAL – ALTERNATE BID 001 E2.0C LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT C – ELECTRICAL E2.0C.A LOWER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT C – ELECTRICAL – ALTERNATE BID 001 E2.1 DOCK LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT OVERALL PLAN – ELECTRICAL E2.1.A DOCK LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT OVERALL PLAN – ELECTRICAL – ALTERNATE BID 001 E2.1A DOCK LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT A – ELECTRICAL E2.1A.A DOCK LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT A – ELECTRICAL – ALTERNATE BID 001 E2.1B DOCK LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMNET B – ELECTRICAL E2.1C DOCK LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT C – ELECTRICAL E2.2 UPPER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT OVERALL PLAN – ELECTRICAL

E2.2A UPPER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT A – ELECTRICAL E2.2B UPPER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT B – ELECTRICAL E2.2C UPPER LEVEL – KITCHEN EQUIPMENT C – ELECTRICAL E3.0 LOWER LEVEL – REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - LIGHTING E3.1 DOCK LEVEL – REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - LIGHTING E3.2 UPPER LEVEL – REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - LIGHTING E4.0 LOWER LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E4.1 DOCK LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E4.2 UPPER LEVEL NEW PLAN – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E5.0 ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM E5.0A ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM E5.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E5.1A ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E5.2 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E5.3 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E5.3A ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES - ALTERNATE BID 001 E5.4 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E5.4A ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES - ALTERNATE BID 001 E6.0 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E6.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS FOOD SERVICE 00-00 FOOD SERVICE INDEX 01-00 KEY PLAN 01-01 KEY PLAN 01-02 KEY PLAN 04-00A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-00 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-01 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-02 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-03 PLUMBING PLAN 04-04 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-05 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-05A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-06 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-07 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-08 PLUMBING PLAN 04-09 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-10 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-10A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-10B COOK CHILL PLANS 04-10C COOK CHILL PLANS 04-11 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-12 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-13 PLUMBING PLAN 04-14 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-15 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-16 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-17 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-18 PLUMBING PLAN

04-19 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-20 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-20A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-21 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-22 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-23 PLUMBING PLAN 04-24 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-25 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-25A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-26 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-27 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-28 PLUMBING PLAN 04-29 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-30 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-30A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-31 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-32 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-33 PLUMBING PLAN 04-34 ELECTRICAL PLAN 04-35 EQUIPMENT PLAN 04-35A EQUIPMENT 3D 04-36 UTILITY SCHEDULE 04-37 BUILDING CONDITIONS & VENTILATION PLAN 04-38 PLUMBING PLAN 04-39 ELECTRICAL PLAN 05-00 ELEVATIONS 05-01 ELEVATIONS 05-02 ELEVATIONS 05-03 ELEVATIONS 05-04 ELEVATIONS 05-05 ELEVATIONS 05-06 ELEVATIONS 05-07 ELEVATIONS 05-08 STANDARD DETAILS 05-09 STANDARD DETAILS 05-10 STANDARD DETAILS 05-11 STANDARD DETAILS 05-12 STANDARD DETAILS 05-13 STANDARD DETAILS 07-00 HOODS 07-01 HOODS 07-02 HOODS 07-03 HOODS 07-04 HOODS 07-05 HOODS 07-06 HOODS 07-07 HOODS 07-08 REFRIGERATION 07-08A REFRIGERATION 07-08B REFRIGERATION 07-08C REFRIGERATION

07-09 WALK-INS 07-10 WALK-INS 07-11 WALK-INS 07-12 WALK-INS 07-13 WALK-INS 07-14 WALK-INS 07-15 WALK-INS 07-16 WALK-INS 07-17 WALK-INS 07-18 WALK-INS 07-19 WALK-INS 07-20 WALK-INS 07-21 WALK-INS 07-22 WALK-INS 07-23 WALK-INS 07-24 WALK-INS 07-25 WALK-INS 07-26 WALK-INS 07-27 WALK-INS 07-28 WALK-INS 07-29 WALK-INS 07-30 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-31 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-32 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-33 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-34 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-35 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-36 POWER SOAK SINKS 07-37 ICE BUILDER

December 4, 2014

Revised June 2, 2015

RGE Job 14-243

REPORT OF SOILS EXPLORATION

WATTERSON COMMONS DINING EXPANSION

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY

NORMAL, ILLINOIS

INTRODUCTION

This report presents results of our site exploration which was performed to determine subsurface

soil and groundwater conditions for the proposed addition planned to the Watterson Commons

facility on the Illinois State University campus in Normal, Illinois. The geotechnical services were

performed at the request of Mr. Tim Weber of Cordogan Clark & Associates, Inc. in accordance

with the scope of services outlined in the Ramsey Geotechnical Engineering LLC (RGE) proposal

dated November 12, 2014. Results of field and laboratory work and recommendations based upon

that work are included in the following sections of this report.

SITE/PROJECT DESCIRPTION

The existing Watterson Commons Dining facility is located at the southwest corner of North Street

and Fell Avenue on the Illinois State University campus in Normal, Illinois. The addition will be

located to the east of the existing structure. The area of the new construction is grass covered

with some trees and landscaping. Ground surface elevations were measured near each end of

the addition by level survey methods using a Town of Normal Datum elevation of 82.24 for the

upper level floor slab of the existing building. Based upon these elevations, the area of the planned

new construction generally slopes down from the north to the south. The change in grade within

the limits of our exploration is slightly more than four feet.

Watterson Commons Dining Expansion Illinois State University Normal, Illinois RGE Job 14-243 December 4, 2014 Revised June 2, 2015

PAGE 2 OF 10

The addition will a have a footprint covering an area of approximately 12,000 square feet. The

addition will have multiple floor levels that will match those of the existing building. The top of slab

elevations for the existing building are 82.24 for the upper level, 72.08 for the dock level and 67.41

for the lower level. The expected bottom of footing elevation is 65.74 which is on the order of 6 to

10 feet below the existing ground surface. Maximum interior column loads are expected to be

approximately 200 kips. The perimeter basement wall will have concentrated loads of

approximately 100 kips.

FIELD EXPLORATION

A total of two (2) soil test borings were completed on the project site near the north and south

ends of the planned addition based upon a site plan provided by Cordogan Clark & Associates,

Inc. Both of these borings were drilled to a depth of 20 feet below the existing ground surface.

The boring locations are shown on the Boring Location Plan included in the Appendix of this

report.

The borings were drilled and sampled according to currently recommended American Society for

Testing and Materials (ASTM) specifications. Soil sampling was performed at 2-1/2 foot intervals

to a depth of 15 feet and at 5 foot intervals thereafter to the bottom of the borings. Samples were

obtained in conjunction with the Standard Penetration Test, for which the driving resistance of a

2 inch diameter split-spoon sampler provides an indication of the relative density of granular

materials and consistency of cohesive soils. Water level readings were taken during and following

completion of the drilling operations.


PAGE 3 OF 10

LABORATORY TESTING

Soil samples were examined in the laboratory to verify field descriptions and to determine

classifications in accordance with the Unified Classification System. Laboratory testing included

moisture content determinations on all cohesive soil types. Measurements of unconfined

compressive strengths on natural cohesive soil samples were made. A calibrated penetrometer

was also utilized to provide estimates of the unconfined compressive strength. Selected samples

were also tested to determine dry unit weight values.

All phases of the laboratory testing program were conducted in general accordance with

applicable ASTM standards. The results of these tests are shown on the boring logs included in

the Appendix of this report.

SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

Surface deposits of dark brown clayey topsoil were noted at both boring locations. The topsoil is

on the order of one foot thick.

At Boring B-1, the northern boring, the soils below the topsoil consist of silty clay. These soils are

tough in relative consistency with unconfined compressive strength values between 1.25 and 1.5

tons per square foot (tsf). Moisture content values in these deposits are typically between 20 and

30 percent. These soils were found to a depth of approximately 11 feet below the existing ground

surface. A layer of sand which extends to a depth of approximately 16 feet was found below the

silty clay. This sand is firm in relative density with N values between 11 and 20 blows per foot. An

underlying layer of silty clay was found at this location. This deposit is hard in relative consistency

with an unconfined compressive strength value near 4.0 tsf. The moisture content of these soils

are near 13 percent. The silty clay extends to the termination depth of the boring.


PAGE 4 OF 10

Silty clay soils were also noted below the topsoil at Boring B-2. These soils appear to represent

fill placed during past construction activities. These soils have dry unit weight values in the range

of 90 to 105 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) and moisture content values between 25 and 15 percent.

The dry unit weight values increase and the moisture content values decrease with depth. These

soils were found to a depth of approximately 6 feet below the existing ground surface. Deposits

of clayey and sandy silt were encountered below the silty clay. These non-cohesive soils are loose

in relative density with N values of 6 to 7 blows per foot. Corresponding moisture content values

range from approximately 19 to 24 percent. A layer of sand was found below the silt at a depth of

approximately 13 feet. This sand is firm in relative density with an N value of 16 blows per foot.

These deposits extend to a depth of 17 feet where very tough silty clay was encountered,

extending to the termination depth of the boring.

Free water was noted in the bore holes while drilling at depths of 13 to 14 feet below the existing

ground surface. Upon completion and removal of the augers, both of the bore holes were dry.

ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Foundation Design

As previously noted, the addition is expected to have a footing bearing elevation of 65.74 which

is on the order of 6 to 10 feet below the existing ground surface. The soils at this elevation consist

of moderate strength silty clay or clayey silt. Based upon these conditions, we recommend a net

allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf) for design of the footings.


PAGE 5 OF 10

It must be noted that these very silty soils can become unstable during completion of the footing

excavations. If the soils exposed at the bearing elevation become unstable, they should be

removed and replaced with crushed stone structural fill. If removal and replacement is required,

the width of the foundation undercuts should exceed footing dimensions by at least 6 inches along

each side for every foot of overdig as measured at the base of the excavation. Replacement

material should consist of crushed stone having a maximum size of 3 inches and a minimum size

of ¼ inch and containing no fines. Illinois Department of Transportation (IDOT) gradation

specifications for CA-1, CA-3, CA-5 and CA-7 meet these criteria. The structural fill should be

spread in 12 inch layers loose thickness with each layer densified using vibratory compaction

equipment. Footings supported on the crushed stone fill may be designed using a net allowable

bearing pressure of 2,000 psf.

Based upon the magnitude of the structural loads and the proximity of the foundations for the

existing building, the size of new footings designed based upon the recommended bearing

pressure may be impractical. An alternative would be to extend the footings to bear on the

underlying firm sand encountered at elevations of approximately 65 at Boring B-1 and 59 at Boring

B-2. Footings bearing on these deposits may be designed using a net allowable bearing pressure

of 5,000 psf. It must be noted that water was encountered within these sand deposits at the time

the borings were completed. Given these conditions, it is probable that excavation dewatering will

be required if the excavations extend to and into the sand. Removal and replacement of portions

of the sand may also be required if they become unstable due to the groundwater conditions and

excavating activities. If required, removal and replacement should be in accordance with the

recommendations previously outlined in this report section.

For frost considerations, all exterior footings should be constructed at least 3-1/2 feet below the

exterior finished grade and 4 feet below grade for foundations located outside of heated building

limits. Interior footings may be constructed at higher elevations as long as they are protected

against frost heave in the event of winter construction.


PAGE 6 OF 10

The addition could also be supported on a deep foundation system. Due to the proximity of the

existing building and other structures in the project area, installation of driven piling could result

in vibrations which could impact existing foundations. Therefore, this deep foundation type is not

recommended.

Other possible deep foundation types include drilled piers/caissons, augercast piles, helical piers

and micropiles. These foundation types are either drilled or pushed to the bearing stratum

reducing possible impacts on adjacent structures. Recommended soil parameters for design of

possible deep foundations systems follow. These values are based upon the worst case

conditions encountered in the two borings.

Elevation

Range

Unit Weight

(pcf)

Cohesion

(psf)

Angle of

Internal

Friction

(Degrees)

Adhesion

(psf)

End Bearing

Capacity

(psf)

66 – 59 115 0 28 200 2,000

59 – 55 115 0 32 600 5,000

55 – 52 120 2,000 0 500 5,000

It must be noted that the borings were terminated at a lowest elevation of approximately 52. If a

deep foundation system is planned with a bearing elevation at or below this elevation, additional

deeper borings are recommended to allow for development of design parameters.


PAGE 7 OF 10

Excavation Stability/Dewatering

The subsurface profile at the boring locations to the anticipated excavation depths include

deposits of moderate strength clay and clayey silt along with wet sand seams below elevations

ranging from approximately 65 to 59. Therefore, some groundwater seepage is expected during

completion of excavations for the lower level of the structure. This water seepage along with the

low strengths of the soils could result in unstable conditions. We anticipate that the water seepage

can be controlled by pumping the water from temporary construction sumps located outside the

perimeter of the excavation. We also recommend that a permanent perimeter drain tile that

collects water into sump pit(s) with automatic pumps be included in the lower level portions of the

structure.

In addition to the recommended dewatering procedures, excavation bracing or slopes flat enough

to prevent caving of the excavations will be required for protection of workers. Based upon the

requirements outlined by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) in 29 CFR

Parts 1926.650 through 1926.652, the low strength deposits encountered to the expected

excavation depth are classified as a Type C Soil. In accordance with OSHA, unprotected slopes

in Type C soil cannot be steeper than 1-1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical. If site limitations require slopes

steeper than those allowed by OSHA, excavation bracing will be required in the overlying soils.

Below Grade Walls

It is possible that a wide range of materials will be used as backfill for the below grade walls of

the new structure. This could include the on site silty clay soils or imported free draining sand and

gravel. In areas where structures or slabs are planned around the perimeter of the below grade

portion of the building, we recommend that a free draining granular material be used as backfill

to minimize the risk of settlement. In areas where landscaping is planned and a nominal amount

of settlement can be tolerated, the on site silty clay soils may be suitable for use as backfill.

Recommendations regarding lateral pressure for the design of these walls, depending upon the

backfill type, follow. The recommended pressures assume a triangular pressure distribution and

a drained condition.


PAGE 8 OF 10

Backfill Description Lateral Pressure in PSF per Foot of Depth

Active Passive At Rest

Free Draining Sand

and Gravel 40 300 60

Poor Draining Silty

Sand and Gravel 50 275 70

Silty Clay 60 250 80

Seismic Class

We have reviewed information regarding the Site Seismic Class considering the soil profile

encountered in the borings. Based upon the criteria contained in Table 1613.5.2 of the

International Building Code (IBC), we recommend a Site Class of D.

Site Subgrade Preparation/Fill Placement/Soil Modulus

Prior to mass grading the topsoil and vegetation should be stripped from the floor slab on grade

and pavement areas. These areas should then be proof-rolled in order to detect the presence of

unstable conditions. The proof-roll should be performed using a loaded dump truck or other

approved piece of heavy rubber-tired construction equipment. All soft or unstable materials

defined by proof-rolling should either be reworked and recompacted or, if that does not improve

subgrade stability, removed and replaced. Based upon moisture content values in excess of 20

percent for the near surface soils at several of the boring locations, subgrade instability is

anticipated in some areas.

Clay soils can typically be stabilized by reducing the moisture content and recompacting. For

obvious reasons, this will work best in hot, dry and windy weather which may or may not be the

case at the time construction is completed. Based upon an estimated optimum moisture content

in the range of 15 to 20 percent for the site subgrade soils, reductions in the moisture of up to 10

percentage points may be required.


PAGE 9 OF 10

In areas where unstable subgrade conditions are encountered, removal and replacement with

select granular fill can also be used for stabilization. Typically, placement of 12 to 24 inches of

coarse aggregate can be required. The coarse aggregate may consist of crushed stone or gravel

between about ¼ to 3 inches in size and containing no fines. The aggregate should be placed in

12 inch thick lifts and compacted to a dense and sable state. A geotextile fabric cloth can also be

used as a separation layer between soft soils and the aggregate to provide additional stability.

New fill otherwise should consist of approved granular materials or inorganic silty clays of medium

to high plasticity. It is recommended that compaction for building pad and pavement areas be to

a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry unit weigh as determine by the Standard Proctor

Test (ASTM D 698). The fill should be placed in approximate 9-inch lifts loose measure with each

lift compacted to the specified dry unit weight prior to placement of additional fill.

Moisture control is important in the compaction of most soils. It is recommended that the moisture

content of the existing subgrade or new fill be within 1 percentage point on the low side and 3

percentage points on the high side of the optimum moisture content as established by the

Standard Proctor Test. If the soil is compacted too dry, it will have an apparent stability which will

be lost if it later becomes saturated. If the soil is too wet, the Contractor will not be able to achieve

proper compaction.

Providing the subgrade is prepared and fill is placed in accordance with the preceding guidelines,

we recommend a subgrade modulus value of 150 pci for design of slabs on grade.

CLOSURE

We recommend that full time site observations and testing be provided by RGE personnel during

foundation construction to document that soils capable of achieving the recommended bearing

capacity have been encountered at the planned bearing elevation. In addition, monitoring of

building materials and fill placement and compaction should be completed to document

compliance with the recommended procedures and specifications.


PAGE 10 OF 10

The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained

from the two (2) soil borings performed at the locations indicated on the Boring Location Plan.

This report does not reflect any variations which may occur beyond these borings, the nature and

extent of which may not become evident until during the course of construction. If variations are

then identified, the recommendations contained in this report should be re-evaluated after

performing on-site observations.

Douglas P. Ramsey

Licensed Professional Engineer

Illinois No. 062-040905

APPENDIX

BORING LOCATION PLAN

BORING LOGS

Dark brown clayey TOPSOIL (OL)

Tough dark brown sitly CLAY, trace sand(CL)

Tough brown very silty CLAY, trace sand(CL)

Tough brown-gray very silty CLAY, tracesand (CL)

Tough brown very silty CLAY, trace sand(CL)

Firm brown fine to medium SAND (SP)

Hard gray silty CLAY, trace sand and gravel(CL)

End of Boring at 20.0' * Approximate unconfined compressive

strength based on measurements with a calibrated pocket penetrometer.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1.0

3.0

6.0

8.0

11.0

16.0

75.1

73.1

70.1

68.1

65.1

60.1

SS

SS

SS

SS

SS

SS

SS

8

5

6

5

20

11

15

27.8

28.3

24.3

21.2

9.0

12.6

12.6

1.5*

1.5*

1.25*

1.25*

4.144.0*

0

5

10

15

20

25

RS

11-24-14 11-24-14

Watterson Towers Commons Dining Expansion, ISU, Normal, I

14.0 '

B-1 14-243

76.1

Cordogan Clark & Associates, Inc., 960 Ridgeway Ave., Aurora, IL 60506

DRY56.1

approximate boundaries between soil types;

DATE STARTED

AT END OF BORING

DATE COMPLETED

SAMPLEWC DRY DEPTHN

;

in-situ, the transition may be gradual.

Division lines between deposits represent

WATER TABLE

GROUND SURFACE

END OF BORING

WHILE DRILLING

JOB

24 HOURS

ELEV. SOIL DESCRIPTIONSNO. TYPE

DISTANCE BELOW SURFACE IN FEET

LENGTH

RECOVERY

DRILL RIG NO.

PROJECT

CLIENT

BORING

ELEVATIONS

Qu

Dark brown clayey TOPSOIL (OL)

FILL - Dark brown-brown silty CLAY, tracesand and gravel (CL)

Loose brown-gray clayey SILT, trace sand(ML)

Loose gray-brown clayey SILT, trace sand(ML)

Loose brown sandy SILT (ML)

Firm brown fine to medium SAND (SP)

Very tough gray silty CLAY, trace sand andgravel (CL)

End of Boring at 20.0' * Approximate unconfined compressive

strength based on measurements with a calibrated pocket penetrometer.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

13.0

17.0

70.9

65.9

63.9

61.9

58.9

54.9

SS

SS

SS

SS

SS

SS

SS

90.7

104.3

9

7

7

6

6

16

18

24.3

15.2

21.3

23.5

18.8

14.0

4.0*

4.5*

1.982.0*

0

5

10

15

20

25

RS

11-24-14 11-24-14

Watterson Towers Commons Dining Expansion, ISU, Normal, I

13.0 '

B-2 14-243

71.9

Cordogan Clark & Associates, Inc., 960 Ridgeway Ave., Aurora, IL 60506

DRY51.9

approximate boundaries between soil types;

DATE STARTED

AT END OF BORING

DATE COMPLETED

SAMPLEWC DRY DEPTHN

;

in-situ, the transition may be gradual.

Division lines between deposits represent

WATER TABLE

GROUND SURFACE

END OF BORING

WHILE DRILLING

JOB

24 HOURS

ELEV. SOIL DESCRIPTIONSNO. TYPE

DISTANCE BELOW SURFACE IN FEET

LENGTH

RECOVERY

DRILL RIG NO.

PROJECT

CLIENT

BORING

ELEVATIONS

Qu

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY CORDOGAN, CLARK & ASSOCIATES, INC. WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 960 RIDGEWAY AVENUE NORMAL, ILLINOIS AURORA, ILLINOIS CCA PROJECT NUMBER: 14362 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 01, 2016

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Sequence of Work. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Owner-furnished products. 7. Access to site. 8. Coordination with occupants. 9. Work restrictions. 10. Specification and drawing conventions.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Watterson Dining Expansion Project.

B. Owner: Board of Trustees of Illinois State University.

1. Owner's Representative: Mike Johnson, Director Construction, Ph. 309-438-2732.

C. Architect: Cordogan Clark & Associates Inc., 960 Ridgeway Avenue, Aurora, Illinois 60506. Phone: 630-896-4678.

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. Civil Engineering:

Fehr Graham – Engineering & Environmental 755 South Grand Avenue West Springfield, Illinois 62704 P: 217.544.8477 F: 217.544.8483 www.fehr-graham.com

2. Structural Engineering:

Fehr Graham – Engineering & Environmental 755 South Grand Avenue West Springfield, Illinois 62704 P: 217.544.8477 F: 217.544.8483 www.fehr-graham.com

3. Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical:

Henneman Engineering, Inc. 1605 South State Street Champaign, IL 61820 P: 217.359.1514 F: 217.359.9354 www.henneman.com

4. Food Service Equipment:

Ricca Design Studios 5325 S. Valentia Way Greenwood Village, CO 80111 P: 303.221.0500 F: 720.323.4282 www.ricca.com

E. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Architect/Engineer will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for administering and using the Project Web site.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. A 12,000 square foot addition to and partial renovation of the Watterson Towers Commons Building. New and renovated spaces will accommodate a new bakery, cook/chill, cold production, test kitchen and private dining functions.

SUMMARY 011000 - 3

B. Construct project under separate work contracts, under the terms of which the Owner will assign the other contracts to the coordinating contractor, identified as the General Contractor. Refer to 011200 “Multiple Contract Requirements”.

1. General Contractor 2. Heating Contractor 3. Ventilation Contractor 4. Plumbing Contractor 5. Fire Protection Contractor 6. Electrical Contractor

1.5 SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. General requirements:

1. Each Contractor will be required to meet with the Coordinating Contractor to review their safety, staging, and logistics plan prior to commencement of any work in the field. Coordinating Contractor shall compile an overall, coordinated safety, staging, and logistics plan.

2. Each contractor will be required to meet with the Architect and Owner to review the coordinated safety, staging, and logistics plan as compiled by the Coordinating Contractor prior to commencement of any work in the field. Coordinating Contractor shall run this meeting and provide meeting notes. Owner shall approve of this plan

3. Each contractor is hereby made aware that spaces adjacent to the work area will be occupied throughout the calendar year. Contractor shall make best efforts to maintain a safe and comfortable environment for staff, students, and faculty.

4. Each contractor is responsible for any of the work scope below that is within their bid package. Any items listed below that do not fall under the Heating, Ventilation, Plumbing, Fire Protection, or Electrical bid packages will be considered part of the General Trades bid package. All contractors are expected to collaborate with one another to provide the below outlined items. Costs for disputed items will be equally shared among the contractors involved.

B. Sequencing of Work

1. Refer to Sheet T2.0 construction Phase Coordination for phasing information affecting all contractors.

2. The following operations must be done during premium-time hours:

a. Final connection to existing services affecting operations within the existing building including but not limited to water, gas, sanitary, slurry lines, ventilation, and electrical.

3. Provide all temporary and permanent construction required to allow Owner to occupy and utilize the existing building by the dates outlined above including, but not limited to:

SUMMARY 011000 - 4

a. Weathertight enclosures, roofing, and sealants. b. Protection from cold, heat, and the elements. c. Fire Separations d. Dust partitions e. Temporary exiting pathways and enclosures. Including code-compliant signage

and lighting. f. Protection from overhead hazards g. Roof Protection h. Temporary and permanent routing of utilities within the existing building to serve

the new addition. i. Negative air machines and temporary ventilation required to maintain proper and

clean conditions within occupied areas. j. Maintaining ventilation to existing louvers. Provide filter media as needed to keep

air intakes clean. k. Temporary Partitions / window board-up l. All of the above shall be provided per local codes and Fire Department

requirements and Authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Site Safety, Staging and logistics including:

a. Exterior loading dock shall remain accessible at all times. Contractor may occupy half of the dock area as directed by the Owner to complete the work.

b. Maintain protected pedestrian per sheet A0.1. Contractor shall make all arrangements with the City and the Owner to provide safe passage of students around the site or on other pedestrian pathways.

c. Contractor shall make all arrangements with the City and the Owner for lane closures required to complete construction and stage materials.

d. See Sheet A0.1 for additional information.

5. Maintain the following areas within the Watterson building:

a. (1) Freezer b. (1) Cooler c. (1) Dry storage d. Locker rooms e. Provide construction (temporary or permanent) within existing facility. Provide

temporary barrier as required to maintain safety and owner-access to dock, freight elevator and compactor as required.

6. Maintain cart wash area (with permanent or temporary construction) as required during construction until permanent cart wash facilities are in place. General prime to provide enclosure, plumbing prime to provide water connections, and electrical prime to provide power.

7. Maintain a minimum (1) dock door and portion of dock and trash compactor open at all times with access to dry, cooler, freezer storage and freight elevator.

SUMMARY 011000 - 5

1.6 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.

1. Relocation of cooled or frozen products in coolers or freezers identified for relocation.

2. Relocation of miscellaneous mobile food service equipment, dry storage goods and associated shelving.

3. Relocation of furniture and computer equipment.

4. Purchase and installation of new furniture of computer equipment.

C. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Scoping and any subsequent repair of existing under slab cast-iron sanitary pipe downstream of Work under Cold Production renovation.

D. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.

1. (Re)Stocking of relocated coolers or freezers.

2. Installation of new and existing furnishings.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Existing food service equipment.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

SUMMARY 011000 - 6

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas of work. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

SUMMARY 011000 - 7

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: During summer break work hours are not limited. Please note the following exceptions:

1. If work extends beyond summer break, working hours shall be determined by the University.

2. Any black-out periods specified on sheet T2.0.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Policy: No smoking shall be allowed on campus.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on campus is not permitted.

1.11 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

SUMMARY 011000 - 8

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

MULTIPLE CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 011200 - 1


SECTION 011200 - MULTIPLE CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE:

A. Section includes a summary of each contract, including responsibilities for coordination and temporary facilities and controls.

B. Specific requirements for Work of each contract are also indicated in individual Specification Sections and on Drawings.



B. Section 011000 "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents, restrictions on use of Project site, coordination with occupants, and work restrictions.

C. Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for general coordination requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Owner: Shall mean the Board of Trustees of Illinois State University.

B. Architect/Engineer (A/E): Shall mean the person or persons, firm, partnerships, corporations or other business entities under contract with the Owner as architect, engineer or both.

C. Contractor: The Contractor is any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, joint venture or other entity who has entered into a prime construction contract with the Owner.

D. Coordinating Contractor: The designated contractor to whom the Owner may assign limited administration of the other contracts.

E. Assigned Contractor: An assigned contractor is a contractor who has been assigned to the Coordinating Contractor for purposes of scheduling and coordination of the work. This assignment is limited and the Owner retains certain rights of the contract.

F. Work: The work comprises the complete construction required by the contract documents and includes all necessary labor to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.


G. Provide: Unless otherwise defined by the contract documents, provide means to furnish and install.

H. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, the condition at which roofing is insulated and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures equivalent in weather protection to permanent construction.

1.4 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACTS

A. Separate Contracts: Owner will award separate prime contracts as specified in Section 01 11 00 of the project manual. Owner may designate one contractor, usually the contractor with the majority of the work, as the Coordinating Contractor for the project. Other contracts may be assigned to the Coordinating Contractor as defined herein.

B. Compensation: All contractors agree to be bound by the provisions of this Article. All costs and expenses incurred as a result of assignment are included in the base bid.

1. Each contractor is responsible for any of the work scope that is within their bid package. Any items that do not fall under the Heating, Ventilation, Plumbing, Fire Protection, or Electrical bid packages will be considered part of the General Trades bid package. All contractors are expected to collaborate with one another. Costs for disputed items will be equally shared among the contractors involved.

C. Owner Retained Rights: Owner retains the right to make payments directly to the assigned contractors, execute changes in the work of the assigned contractors and enforce Owner’s rights and responsibilities as contained herein.

D. Coordinating Contractor Liability: Except as specified in the contract documents, the Coordinating Contractor has no obligations or liability for the assigned contractor's contracts or for the assigned contractor's obligations for the payment of labor and materials in connection with the performance of their contracts.

1.5 COORDINATING CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. General: Unless specifically stated elsewhere, the Coordinating Contractor’s responsibilities relate solely to scheduling and coordination of the assigned contractors. Additional duties may be stated in Division 1 of the project manual. The Coordinating Contractor shall administer the entire project by directing, coordinating, scheduling and expediting the assigned contractors' work. The Coordinating Contractor's superintendent shall direct the operations of all assigned contractors. The assigned contractors shall supervise their work in accordance with the instructions of the Coordinating Contractor, subject to the terms of the contract. Administration by the Coordinating Contractor shall not relieve the assigned contractors from their duty to perform, supervise and direct their own work.

B. Default: The Coordinating Contractor agrees to work in concert with the Owner and the surety for the defaulted contractor to ensure completion of the contract in the event of default by any assigned contractor. If the Coordinating Contractor fails to act in this case, all expenses incurred by the Owner because of the Coordinating Contractor's failure to properly act shall be at the


loss, cost and expense of the Coordinating Contractor and its surety. This provision shall not limit the Coordinating Contractor’s legal rights against third parties.

C. The Coordinating Contractor shall:

1. Coordination: Develop and provide a project schedule and other appropriate procedures and methods to ensure that the assigned contractors function harmoniously in accordance with the plans and specifications and meet the Owner’s objectives for cost, time and quality.

2. Communication: Maintain project lines of authority and communication; conduct coordination meetings. Refer to Article 01 31 00.

3. Schedules: Develop, maintain, and enforce the project schedule and the orderly performance of the work within the contract time. Report changed conditions to Owner. Verify that each contractor's labor force, product deliveries, and construction equipment are available and adequate for maintaining the project schedule. Report conditions which will adversely affect the schedule to Owner with recommendations for corrective action. Refer to Article 01 32 00.

4. Submittals: Coordinate processing of shop drawings, product data, samples, project record documents, and other specified submittals by assigned contractors.

5. Interpretations: Consult with A/E to obtain interpretations of the plans and specifications. Assist in resolution of questions which may arise. Transmit written interpretations to concerned parties.

6. Use of Site: Allocate use and location of temporary offices and storage areas. Verify that adequate temporary utilities are provided and maintained. Administer traffic and parking controls.

7. Pay Meetings: Review assigned contractor's application for payment as it relates to the project schedule, including requests for payment for stored materials. The Coordinating Contractor shall recommend approval of the assigned contractor’s payment request or inform, in writing, the assigned contractor, as well as the Owner and the A/E, the reasons why the pay requests should be modified or payment withheld.

8. Change Orders: Review assigned contractor's proposals for change as it affects the schedule and coordination of the project, process the proposals and make recommendations to the A/E. Distribute copies to all contractors whose work will be affected.

9. Inspections: Schedule, give notice, and participate in the inspection, substantial completion, and final acceptance of the work of all contractors.

10. Cleaning: Coordinate the specified construction cleaning and final cleaning. Refer to Articles 01 73 00 and 01 77 00.

11. Startup of Permanent Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: Notify all parties seven calendar days prior to a start-up date. Coordinate the inspection of utilities, systems, and


equipment; initial start-up and testing; instruction of Using Agency's operating personnel. Distribute operation and maintenance manuals seven calendar days prior to start-up.

12. Project Completion: Assemble project record documents (as-built) and other project closeout materials from assigned contractors and deliver to A/E. Refer to Article 01 78 39.

13. Substantial Completion: Upon assigned contractor's notice of substantial completion of work or a portion thereof, coordinate correction and completion of work.

14. Final Completion: Upon assigned contractor's notice that work is complete, submit written notice to A/E and Owner that work is ready for final inspection. Secure and transmit to A/E specified closeout submittals.

15. Site Security: Provide and maintain site security, including entry control of unauthorized persons and protection of the work.. Refer to Articles 01 50 00. Protection and security for store materials and equipment, on and off site is solely each contractor’s responsibility.

16. Access Roads: Provide and maintain vehicular access to and within the site to provide uninterrupted access to work. Provide and maintain traffic control. Refer to Article 01 55 00.

17. Temporary Environmental Controls: Provide and maintain temporary environmental controls until substantial completion. Refer to Article 01 50 00.

18. Field Offices: Provide and maintain field office for Owner, A/E, and the Coordinating Contractor. Refer to Article 01 50 00.

1.6 ASSIGNED CONTRACTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The assigned contractors shall cooperate with the Coordinating Contractor; coordinate work of employees and subcontractors; submit scheduling information to the Coordinating Contractor and comply with the master project schedule; and transmit all submittals and notices to Coordinating Contractor, A/E and Owner in accordance with the contract. Under the administration of the Coordinating Contractor, the assigned contractors shall coordinate their work with that of other contractors.

B. The assigned contractors shall provide scheduling information to the Coordinating Contractor for incorporation into the master project schedule and update as required.

C. The assigned contractors shall provide the Coordinating Contractor with a punch list for review and transmittal to the A/E when the assigned contractor believes that the work or any part is substantially or finally complete.

D. The assigned contractors shall turn over to the Coordinating Contractor operations and maintenance data, spare parts and maintenance materials.

E. Security: Protection and security for store materials and equipment, on and off site is solely each contractor’s responsibility.


F. Assigned Contractors Responsibilities: Responsibilities enumerated above are in addition to all other duties and responsibilities of general application stated elsewhere in the construction documents.

1.7 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Each Contractor shall coordinate installation of equipment, devices and wiring to ensure proper location and function of equipment or systems. Each Contractor shall provide interconnection diagrams to other contractors for water, gas, electric, sewer, air or other services. The Contractor shall locate all equipment, devices, or other materials to avoid interference with work installed by other contractors.

B. Each Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall provide the following:

1. internal wiring or equipment provided by that Contractor. 2. interconnecting wiring for items composed of more than one piece, provided by same

Contractor; and 3. wiring of accessory items considered an integral part of equipment, device or system,

provided by same Contractor.

C. Each Contractor that furnishes or installs equipment specified to be connected by the electrical contractor shall provide complete wiring diagrams to the electrical contractor.

D. Each Contractor shall provide openings for its own work unless stated otherwise. The Contractor shall coordinate openings in walls, floors, ceilings, foundations, slabs on grade or roofs with the other contractors.

E. The space priority for installation of the work is as follows:

1. recessed light fixtures; 2. medium pressure duct work; 3. low pressure duct work; 4. sprinkler piping; 5. soil, waste, vent & storm piping; 6. domestic water piping; 7. electrical conduit; and 8. exceptions: Plumbing lines below or behind plumbing fixtures shall have precedence

over all other work. Electrical conduit above or below switchgear, panel boards and control panels shall have precedence over all other work. Contractors shall not install any fluid conveying piping over electrical or elevator equipment.

F. Each contractor shall comply with clear space requirements of the National Electrical Code.

G. The coordinating contractor shall be responsible for general coordination of assigned contractors work. Assigned contractors shall be responsible for the coordination of work effort of their own forces.


H. At all equipment where electrical power is required, the electrical contractor shall provide conduit and wire required from the power source of the input terminals of the equipment. When specified, the electrical contractor shall provide the electrical disconnect to the equipment.

I. At all equipment where control wiring is required to interconnect various items, such wire and conduit shall be the responsibility of the contractor providing the equipment.

J. All wiring, including conduit, boxes & fittings, for control systems shall be the responsibility of the contractor providing the system.

K. All openings in floor, wall or ceiling shall be coordinated with the coordinating contractor. All openings shall be appropriately sealed by General contractor maintain fire ratings.

L. Operation of equipment or systems shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor until acceptance by Owner.




ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1


SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE

A. Designated Contractors: Provide unit prices on Bid Form for specified items.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Quantity allowances.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances

for testing and inspecting.

1.4 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.


C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.8 LUMP-SUM AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, bonds and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.9 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.


1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES (GENERAL PRIME)

A. Allowance No. 1: Quantity Allowance: Include 2000 cu. yd. of unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off-site and replacement with satisfactory soil material from off-site, as specified in civil drawings.

1. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with unit-price requirements in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."

B. Allowance No. 2: Quantity Allowance: Include 7,000 sf. of moisture vapor emission control as specified in Section 090561.13 “Moisture Vapor Emission Control".


1. This allowance includes material cost, freight, receiving, handling, installation and Contractor overhead and profit.

2. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with corresponding unit-price requirements in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."

C. Allowance No. 3: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000: Include access doors and frames as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames".

1. This allowance includes material cost, receiving, handling, installation and Contractor overhead and profit.


UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1


SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Designated Contractors: Provide unit prices on Bid Form for specified items.



1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

B. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.5 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil material.

1. Description: Unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as required, according to civil drawings.

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated, based on survey of volume removed. 3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements in

Section 012100 "Allowances."

A. Unit Price No. 2: Moisture Vapor Emission Control

1. Description: Install fluid-applied, resin-based, membrane-forming system to control the moisture-vapor-emission rate of high-moisture, interior concrete to prepare it for floor covering installation according to Section 090561.13 "Moisture Vapor Emission Control."

2. Unit of Measurement: Square foot of concrete covered.

B. Unit Price No. 3: Miscellaneous and structural steel.

1. Description: Miscellaneous lintels and other supports not otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, according to Section 051000 "Structural Metal Framing" and Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."

2. Unit of Measurement: Cost in place of pounds of fabricated steel as indicated on itemized invoice of steel supplier and verified by Architect.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 1


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Designated Contractors: Provide Alternate Bid prices in Bid Form for specified alternate work.

B. Each Contractor: Coordinate all related and required work necessary to perform work specified in alternate bids, when accepted and awarded.



B. Bid Forms Document

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.


B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. General Contract

1. Alternate No. 001: Air-Cooled System in Lieu of Water-Cooled

a. Base Bid: Provide roof design per Sheet A4.1. Provide water cooled heat rejection based food service equipment per Food Service drawings and schedules.

b. Alternate: Increase height of roof screen and accommodate additional air cooled rooftop equipment per Sheet A4.1A. Provide new air cooled condensing rack; ice builder for pasta cook/chill kettle (ice builder to be located in Watterson Dining Mechanical Room); air cooled cook/chill tanks (two each).

2. Alternate No. 002: Add Steam Infrastructure

a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A

3. Alternate No. 003: Add Chilled Water Infrastructure

a. Base Bid: Do not provide fire door modifications per 3/A0.1.

b. Alternate: Provide fire door modifications per 3/A0.1.

4. Alternate No. 004: Electrical Distribution (Water Cooled Option)

a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A

5. Alternate No. 005: Retaining Wall – East Elevation


a. Base Bid: Provide concrete walk with custom control joint pattern as indicated on 1/A0.2.

b. Alternate: Provide retaining wall / drainage, landscaping, benches and skate guards per 2/A0.2 and related structural drawings.

6. Alternate No. 006: Elevator Maintenance Agreement

a. Base Bid: Do not provide maintenance service per paragraph 3.6 of specification section 142413 “Hydraulic Freight Elevators”.

b. Alternate: Provide maintenance service per paragraph 3.6 of specification section 142413 “Hydraulic Freight Elevators”.

7. Alternate No. 007: Extended Curtainwall Coverplates

a. Base Bid: Provide standard cover plates screened locations on Sheet A5.2 per Details 1 and 2.

b. Alternate: Provide extended cover plates at screened locations on Sheet A5.2 per Details 3 and 4.

8. Alternate No. 008: Freight Elevator Finish.

a. Base Bid: Provide base bid finishes as specified in Section 142413 “Hydraulic Freight Elevators".

b. Alternate: Provide alternate finishes as specified in 142413 “Hydraulic Freight Elevators".

9. Alternate No. 009: Door Frame Material

a. Base Bid: Provide frame material as indicated on the door schedule on sheet A10.1 and as specified in Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

b. Alternate: Provide stainless steel frame material in lieu of frame material specified in Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” at the following doors: 1) 003, 005, 095A, 206B, and 295

10. Alternate No. 010: Coiling Door Material

a. Base Bid: Provide materials specified in Section 083323 “Overhead Coiling Doors".

b. Alternate: Provide stainless steel in lieu of material specified in Section 083323 “Overhead Coiling Doors".

11. Alternate No. 011: BIM Modeling / Clash Detection

a. Base Bid: Provide 2D DWG based coordination drawings in lieu of Revit based model. Do not provide three dimensional electronic clash detection.


b. Alternate: Provide third party BIM modeling service per sections 013100;1.1;A;1;a and 013100;1.6;B;10

B. Heating Contract

1. Alternate No. 001: DX System in Lieu of Water Cooled a. Base Bid: All 6” and smaller chilled water supply and return as shown on

1/HD1.0, 1/H2.0, 1/H2.1, 1/H2.2, 1/H2.3, 8/H3.0, 1/H3.1, 4/H3.1, and 6/H3.1.

b. Alternate: Provide refrigerant lines and installation for new split DX cooled food service equipment. Route refrigerant lines between roof-mounted air-cooled condensing units shown on alternate roof plan A4.1A to food service equipment shown on food service plans 04-10 and 04-10C. Provide refrigerant lines and installation between new roof mounted air cooled condensing unit shown on alternate roof plan A4.1A to new cooler evaporators shown on food service drawings 04-00, 04-05, 04-15, 04-20, and 04-30. Delete all 6” and smaller chilled water supply and return indicated in Heating Contract.


a. Base Bid: Provide steam infrastructure for all new steam users as shown in heating bid documents not including work identified in Heating Contract Alternate No.002.

b. Alternate: Provide steam pressure reducing stations for all existing steam users. Provide PRV-1, PRV-2, PRV-3, PRV-4, and PRV-5 in Steam Pressure Reducing Valve Schedule on H5.0. Install PRV-1 and PRV-2 as shown in 2/H1.1. Install PRV-3, PRV-4, and PRV-5 as shown in 1/H2.0. Provide new pilot valve springs and valve settings for existing parallel pressure reducing station serving dining commons as shown in 2/H1.0.


a. Base Bid: Provide all 6” and smaller chilled water supply and return as shown in 1/HD1.0, 1/H2.0, 1/H2.1, 1/H2.2, 1/H2.3, 8/H3.0, 1/H3.1, 4/H3.1, 6/H3.1.

b. Alternate: Provide all 8” chilled water supply and return as shown in 1/H1.0, 1/H1.1, 1/H2.1, 1/H2.4, 2/H2.4, 3/H2.4, 6/H3.0, 4/H3.1, 5/H3.1, 6/H3.1, 8/H3.1, 9/H3.1, and 1/H4.0. Provide pump P-1A, pump P-1B, and plate and frame heat exchanger HE-1 on H5.0.


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A

5. Alternate No. 005 through 011

a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


C. Ventilation Contract

1. Alternate No. 001: DX System In lieu of Water Cooled

a. Base Bid: Provide water-cooled rooftop ventilation units as indicated in ventilation bid documents and as scheduled on V5.0.

b. Alternate: Provide Trane DX rooftop ventilation units in lieu of water cooled units as shown on V1.3A and scheduled on V5.1.

2. Alternate No. 002: Add Steam Infrastructure a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A

D. Plumbing Contract

1. Alternate No. 001: DX System in Lieu of Water Cooled

a. Base Bid: Provide 4” NPCW chilled water backup system and associated discharge piping and hub drain shown in 2/P2.07.

b. Alternate: Delete 4” NPCW chilled water backup system and associated discharge

piping and hub drain shown in 2/P2.07. Provide new 1” CW to ice builder as shown on 3/P2.07.


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


3. Alternate No. 003: Add Chilled Water Infrastructure a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A

E. Electrical Contract

1. Alternate No. 001: DX System in Lieu of Water Cooled

a. Base Bid: Provide electrical distribution per Sheets E1.0, E1.1, E1.2, and E5.0. Provide power to water cooled roof top ventilation equipment and relocated air cooled equipment per E1.3. Provide lightening protection system per E1.4. Provide power to base bid water cooled food service equipment. Provide power to water cooled compressor rack on Sheet E2.1A.

b. Alternate: Provide electrical distribution per Sheets E1.0.A, E1.1.A, and E5.0A. Provide power to new air cooled roof top equipment per E1.3-A, and E5.1-A. Provide lightening protection system per E1.4-A. Provide power to all air cooled food service equipment identified as Alternate 001 in all utility schedules sheets E2.0-A, E2.0B-A, E2.0C-A, E2.1-A, and E5.1-A. Provide power to air cooled compressor rack on Sheet E2.1A-A and E5.1-A.


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: Provide VFD’s, electrical connections, and fused switches for new chilled water pumps P-1A & P-1B as shown on sheet E1.5.

4. Alternate No. 004: Electrical Infrastructure Distribution

a. Base Bid: Provide grounding and electrical branch panels CP2, MHEQ, KHEQ, KLEQ1, and KLEQ2 per Sheets E1.0, E1.1, E1.2, and E5.0.


b. Alternate: Provide grounding, electrical distribution feeders, conduit, circuit breakers, electrical distribution panel DP/CEQ, pullboxes, and transformers per Sheets E1.0, E1.1, E1.2, and E5.0.


a. Base Bid: N/A

b. Alternate: N/A


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1


SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Coordinating Contractor: Review Contractor substitution requests for completeness, impact on overall schedule and coordinated Work of other Contractors. Request and collect additional information from Contractors as required. Forward complete requests to A/E and Owner for review.

B. Each Contractor: Submit substitution requests meeting the requirements of this section to coordinating contractor as required.



B. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.

C. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.


A. Substitution Requests: Regardless of the reason for the substitution request, the Contractor shall submit complete data demonstrating compliance of the proposed substitution with contract documents:

1. An itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 2. Data relating to changes in construction schedule, coordination, and other affected

contracts. 3. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method

specified. 4. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method

specified.


B. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through the Coordinating Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within twenty-one days of receipt of request, or twenty-one days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

1. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

2. Use product specified if Architect/Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitution by Change Order. After notice of award, substitutions shall not be accepted if acceptance would require a change order increasing the amount of the contract, and may only be approved by written change order under one of the following conditions:

1. Substitutions are required for compliance with final interpretations of code requirements or insurance regulations

2. Unavailability of specified products, through no fault of contractor. 3. Subsequent information discloses inability of a specified product to perform properly or

to fit in designated space. 4. Manufacturer/fabricator refusal to certify or guarantee performance of a specified product

as specified. 5. When a substitution would be substantially in the Owner's best interests (e.g. better

quality, shorter delivery time, lower cost, etc.).

B. Representations: In making a request for substitution, Contractor represents that:

1. The proposed product is equal or superior to that specified. 2. It will provide an equal or superior guarantee for the substitution as was specified.


3. It will coordinate installation of accepted substitutions into work, making all changes for work to be complete.

4. It will pay all additional costs and expenses for Owner, A/E, and other contractors affected.

5. Cost savings (difference between price of product used in bid and substitution) will be passed on to Owner.

C. Restrictions: Substitutions will not be considered by shop drawing, informal request or when acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents.



C O R D O G A N C L A R K & A S S O C I A T E S , I N C . A R C H I T E C T S ▪ E N G I N E E R S

9 6 0 R I D G E W A Y A V E N U E , A U R O R A , I L L I N O I S 6 0 5 0 6

T E L 6 3 0 . 8 9 6 . 4 6 7 8 F A X 6 3 0 . 8 9 6 . 4 9 8 7

Project Name: ISU Watterson Dining Expansion Substitution Request No.: ___________

CCA Project No.: 14362 Subject description:__________________________ Document Reference: _______________________ Date: _____________________________________ Request by: ________________________________ Attn::_____________________________ Company Name:____________________________ Phone Number:_____________________________ Fax Number:_______________________________ Response Date: _____________________ Attachments: _______________________________________________________________________________ Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: _____________________________ Installer: ___________________________

Address: __________________________________ Address: ___________________________ Phone: __________________________________ Phone: ____________________________ Trade Name: _______________________________ Model No.: ________________________________ Installer: __________________________________ Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Reason for proposing substitution: _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Provide information re: similar installation:

Project: ___________________________________ Address: ___________________________________

Date Installed: ______________________________ Architect: __________________________________ Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: Yes No (circle one). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: Yes No (circle one). Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: $______________________________________________

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

C O R D O G A N C L A R K & A S S O C I A T E S , I N C . A R C H I T E C T S ▪ E N G I N E E R S


T E L 6 3 0 . 8 9 6 . 4 6 7 8 F A X 6 3 0 . 8 9 6 . 4 9 8 7

(Substitution Request Cont.) The Undersigned certifies:

1. Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

2. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. 3. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. 4. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress

schedule. 5. Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution

which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. 6. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. 7. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction

costs caused by the substitution. 8. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitutions will be

complete in all respects.

Submitted by: __________________________________________________________________________ Signed by: _____________________________________________________________________________ Firm: _________________________________________________________________________________ Address: _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ Telephone: _____________________________________________________________________________ A/E’s Review and Action: ______ Substitution Approved- Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 013300. ______ Substitution Approved As Noted- Make submittals in accordance w/ Specification Section 013300. ______ Substitution Rejected- Use specified materials. ______ Substitution Request received too late- Use specified materials. Signed by: ____________________________ Date: _________________________________ Additional Comments: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1


SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Coordinating Contractor:

1. Review all assigned contractors' proposals for change as it affects the schedule and coordination, process the proposals and make its recommendation to the A/E. The Coordinating Contractor shall coordinate and schedule the changed work if accepted.

B. Each Contractor:

1. The value of any change shall be determined prior to the issuance of the change order in one or more of the following ways; by estimate and acceptance in a lump sum; by unit prices named in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon or; by cost and percentage. Cost shall include labor, materials, equipment rental and the cost of power and consumable supplies used in the operation thereof. To such cost there shall be added a percentage fee to cover overhead, profit and any other general expenses. Said fee shall be computed as follows:

a. For the Contractor, for work to be performed by its own forces, not to exceed 15 percent of its cost, determined as set forth above.

b. For the Contractor, for work to be performed by its subcontractor, not to exceed 5 percent of the subcontractor’s cost, determined as set forth above.

c. For the Subcontractor, not to exceed 10 percent of the subcontractor’s cost, determined as set forth above.

2. Change orders which involve extra cost must be approved by the Owner in advance of the additional work being performed. No claim for an addition to the contract price shall be valid unless pursuant to a written change order approved by the Owner.



B. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.


1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 15 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: form acceptable to Architect.


1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Owner’s official form.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1


SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:


1. Collect and organize payment applications from each Assigned Contractor and schedule recurring pencil payment application meeting with A/E and Owner

2. Include updated project schedule with payment application submittal. Failure to submit schedule update may result in reduced payment.

B. Each Contractor:

1. Compile and submit payment applications meeting requirements within this Section to Coordinating Contractor by recurring date determined by Coordinating Contractor. Failure to submit applications on this schedule may result in delay of payment until next scheduled payment date.

2. Include schedule update with payment application submittal to Coordinating Contractor. Failure to submit schedule update may result in reduced payment.



B. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances.

C. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices.

D. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

E. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than fifteen (15) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. e. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. f. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.


5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the first of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment ten (10) days prior to due date for review by Architect.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.


F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

G. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If payments are made on account of materials delivered, suitably stored and adequately insured at the site, but not incorporated in the Work, payment shall be conditional upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other documentation as will establish the Owner’s title to such material or otherwise adequately protect the Owner’s interest.

The Owner may make progress payments for materials and equipment not incorporated in the work that are listed on the Contractors schedule of Values (CSV). Payment will only be permitted when requested and approved in writing.

1. The materials and equipment shall be delivered to and suitable stored at the site or some other location approved in writing by the Owner.

2. The Contractor shall convey and submit title to such materials and equipment to the Owner within seven calendar days after receipt of payment of the material and equipment. This title shall include an itemization of all parts, components, etc. and the quantity of each.

3. The Contractor shall include photographic documentation of all stored materials, including labels for such materials.

4. The care and custody of such materials and equipment and all costs incurred for movement and storage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

5. The Contractor shall suitably insure the materials and equipment. The Contractor shall submit a certificate of insurance showing the Owner as an additional insured and showing the amount of the insurance coverage.

6. Payment shall be restricted to the cost of the material to the installing as supported by invoices from the manufacturer and/or equipment supplier.

7. Upon demand by the Owner, the Contractor shall deliver paid for stored materials or equipment to the site and to the Owner’s possession, at the Contractor’s expense.


8. If the paid for materials or equipment is in the possession of a subcontractor or supplier who is a fabricator that has added value to the materials or equipment, and the Contractor has not paid the fabricator for the added value, the Owner may issue a joint check to the Contractor and fabricator of the added value, and the fabricator or Contractor shall then be required to deliver the materials or equipment to the site and to the Owner’s possession, at their expense. The fabricator shall provide a waiver within ten calendar days of payment. If the Contractor has been paid for the value added, but has refused to pay the fabricator the amount shall be deducted as a set-off.

H. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens and affidavit from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating

Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.


K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

L. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

Under no circumstances will final payment be authorized unit the Contractor has filed each of the following with the Architect / Engineer: final release and waivers-of-lien from each subcontractor and material or equipment supplier; final affidavits from each subcontractor; a final release and waiver-of-lien; an affidavit for final completion and such additional applicable documentation as set forth below. Additional documentation that must be filed with the Architect/Engineer before the final payment is authorized shall include, but not necessarily be limited to:

1. Contractor’s written guarantee covering all work for a period of one year from the date of final payment for the completed work or the date specified in the bid documents uless written acceptance of particular portion of work occurs at an earlier date;

2. Special written guarantees for periods longer than one year, as called for in the Specifications.

3. One marked-up “As-built” set of the Contract Documents; and, 4. Six sets of “Operating and Maintenance Instructions.”




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1


SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. General coordination procedures

a. Coordinating Contractor shall retain a third party consultant specializing in Building Information Model generation and coordination to generate.

b. Coordinating Contractor will schedule and administer coordination meetings, distribute written notice of and agenda for meetings, record minutes and distribute copies of minutes of meetings to participants and Architect/Engineer. This distribution shall occur with seven (7) calendar days after meetings.

2. Requests for Information (RFI)

a. It is the Coordinating Contractor’s sole responsibility to resolve Assigned Contractor questions and concerns regarding construction coordination, means and methods affecting other Contractor’s work and scheduling of the Work. Architect / Engineer reserves to the right to defer requests for information meeting this criteria to the Coordinating Contractor.

3. Project meetings

B. Each Contractor:

1. Coordination Procedures: Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

2. Coordination Drawings

a. Participation and attendance in the timely development of the coordination model and associated meetings is mandatory for each contractor. Associated costs shall be included in the base bid and sufficient time included in the construction schedule.

b. Provide scanned PDF, AutoCAD DWG or Revit drawings to Coordinating Contractor’s consultant for use in generating the main coordination model.


3. Requests for Information (RFI)

a. Do not submit questions to Architect/Engineer regarding coordination of work between Contractors, means and methods affecting other Contractors’ Work and scheduling of the Work. This is the sole responsibility of the Coordinating Contractor.

4. Project web site: Electronic submittals and all other construction related communication and documentation (i.e. RFI, RFP, COR, ASI, Meeting Minutes, Construction Schedules, Payment Applications, Field Reports, Logs etc.) shall be transmitted to Architect / Engineer in electronic (PDF) format using Submittal Exchange, a website service designed specifically for transmitting submittals between construction team members.

5. Project meetings: Each Contractor shall attend all meetings scheduled by Coordinating Contractor. Each Contractor shall ensure the attendance of its subcontractors and suppliers when required for coordination.



B. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.

C. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

D. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

E. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, email address and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.


B. Key Personnel Names: Within (15) fifteen days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values.


3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Preinstallation conferences. 6. Project closeout activities. 7. Startup and adjustment of systems.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Coordination drawing must be prepared prior to any shop drawings and RFI’s being submitted in the areas indicated. Any shop drawings and RFI’s that are submitted prior to coordination drawings being complete and agreed upon will be returned by the architect without action. Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information,:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,

valves, and other controls. e. Indicate required installation sequences. f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.


2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations. b. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination and construction of the actual work, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. BIM File Incorporation: Coordinating Contractor coordination drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project.

a. Coordinating Contractor will perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements or an interpretation by Architect.

b. Sequencing: Complete sufficient overhead demolition prior to preparation of coordination drawings.

c. Discovered Conditions: Include any discovered conditions not present in design documentation which will have an effect on routing or placement of Work in the coordination drawings.

d. Retain a third party consultant specializing in Building Information Model generation and coordination if required to meet the requirements above.


11. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. Contractor accepts the information given and will verify for the coordination drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2015. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement

included in this Project Manual. See Section 013300.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: As indicated above in Coordination Drawing requirements no action will be taken by the Architect until coordination drawings are completed and accepted. Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Coordinating or Assigned Contractors with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, are required. 9. Drawing number and detail references are required. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. Any RFI’s submitted without an appropriate

resolution will be returned without action. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form to be completed and submitted via Project Web Site. .

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.


D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow a minimum of ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Maintain a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Use software log that is part of Project Web site.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Project Web Site: Submittal Exchange (www.submittalexchange.com)

B. Summary: 1. Electronic submittals and all other construction related communication and

documentation (i.e. RFI, RFP, COR, ASI, Meeting Minutes, Construction Schedules, Payment Applications, Field Reports, Logs etc.) shall be transmitted to Architect / Engineer in electronic (PDF) format using Submittal Exchange, a website service designed specifically for transmitting submittals between construction team members.

2. The intent of electronic submittals is to expedite the construction process by reducing paperwork, improving information flow, and decreasing turnaround time.


3. The electronic submittal process is not intended for color samples, color charts, or physical material samples.

C. Procedures: 1. Submittal Preparation–Each Contractor may use any or all of the following options:

a. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide electronic (PDF) submittals to each Contractor via the Submittal Exchange website.

b. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to Contractor who electronically scans and converts to PDF format.

c. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to Scanning Service which electronically scans and converts to PDF format.

2. Both Coordinating and Assigned Contractors shall review and apply electronic stamp certifying that the submittal complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents including verification of manufacturer / product, dimensions and coordination of information with other parts of the work.

3. Each Contractor shall transmit each submittal to Architect / Engineer using the Submittal Exchange website, www.submittalexchange.com.

4. Architect / Engineer review comments will be made available on the Submittal Exchange website for downloading. Each Contractor will receive email notice of completed review.

5. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility of each Contractor.

D. Costs: 1. Architect / Engineer has included the full cost of Submittal Exchange project subscription

in their contract. 2. Internet Service and Equipment Requirements:

a. Email address and Internet access at each contractor’s main office. b. Adobe Acrobat (www.adobe.com), Bluebeam PDF Revu (www.bluebeam.com), or

other similar PDF review software for applying electronic stamps and comments.

E. Initial Setup: 1. Architect will provide template to Submittal Exchange for initial folder and log setup.

F. Training: 1. Training is available from Submittal Exchange regarding using the website and PDF

submittals. Contact Submittal Exchange at 1-800-714-0024.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General Requirements: Each Contractor shall attend all preconstruction, pay/progress and coordination meetings. Each Contractor shall ensure the attendance of its subcontractors and suppliers when required for coordination.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference within seven (7) calendar days after notice of award. Attendance will include Owner, Contractors, the A/E, Using Agency and major subcontractors. Coordinating contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies of minutes to participants and Owner. This distribution shall occur within seven (7) calendar days after meetings.


C. Payment and Progress Meetings: Coordinating Contractor will schedule and administer payment and progress meetings, distribute written notice of and agenda for meetings, record minutes and distribute copies of minutes of meetings to participants and Owner. This distribution shall occur with seven (7) calendar days after meetings.

D. Coordination Meetings: Coordinating Contractor will schedule and administer coordination meetings, distribute written notice of and agenda for meetings, record minutes and distribute copies of minutes of meetings to participants and Owner. This distribution shall occur with seven (7) calendar days after meetings.




C O R D O G A N C L A R K & A S S O C I A T E S , I N C . C O N S T R U C T I O N M A N A G E M E N T


T E L 6 3 0 . 8 9 6 . 4 6 7 8 F A X 6 3 0 . 8 9 6 . 4 9 8 7

Project Name: ISU Watterson Dining Expansion RFI NO: ___________

CCA Project No.: 14362 Subject: ___________________________________ Document Reference: _______________________ Date: _____________________________________ Information requested by:_____________________ Attn::____________________________ Company Name:____________________________ Phone Number:_____________________________ Fax Number:_______________________________ Attachments: _______________________________________________________________________________ Request for Information: Requested Response Date:

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Suggested Solution: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESPONSE FROM: DATE RESOLVED: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Cc:

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1


SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Prepare and maintain a detailed project schedule as required herein. It shall indicate how the contractors plan to complete the work within the contract time and meet any contractually specified intermediate milestone dates. The project schedule shall be the Contractor’s working schedule and used to execute the work, record and report actual progress.

2. The schedule shall be updated monthly and include actual dates of completed tasks.

B. Each Contractor:

1. Assigned contractors shall submit projected construction schedules to Coordinating Contractor

2. Contractors shall report in writing on a monthly basis any problem areas; current and anticipated delay factors and their impact; any corrective action taken and the effect of changes in the schedules to the Coordinating Contractor.



B. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's construction schedule.

C. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

D. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.


1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect .

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date].

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.


D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones,

and partial Owner occupancy if required.. 3. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 4. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 5. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. See Section 013300

Submittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 8. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 9. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. General: The Coordinating Contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed project schedule as required herein. It shall indicate how the contractors plan to complete the work within the contract time and meet any contractually specified intermediate milestone dates. The project schedule shall be the Contractor’s working schedule and used to execute the work, record and report actual progress.

B. Inclusions: The schedule shall clearly show all installation tasks of the work and identify the critical schedule items of the work. Submittal and approval of shop drawings and samples and delivery dates of critical material or equipment shall be included in the master project schedule.

C. Updates: The schedule shall be updated monthly and include actual dates of completed tasks.

D. Preparation:

1. Assigned contractors shall submit projected construction schedules to Coordinating Contractor within seven (7) calendar days after preconstruction meeting.

2. The Coordinating Contractor shall submit the master project schedule to the A/E within fourteen (14) calendar days after preconstruction meeting.

3. Each Contractor shall submit a schedule to A/E within fourteen calendar days after preconstruction meeting if contracts are not assigned.

4. The schedule shall be a critical path method (CPM) schedule unless otherwise specified in the project manual.

E. Reports: The Contractors shall report in writing on a monthly basis any problem areas; current and anticipated delay factors and their impact; any corrective action taken and the effect of changes in the schedules.

F. Failure to Schedule: Payment and reduction of retainage may be denied by Owner for the failure to submit and maintain a proper schedule.

G. Reviews: The A/E and Owner may review and comment on the schedule and may also attend any scheduling and update meetings. The Contractors shall maintain the schedule as directed by the A/E and/or Owner for compliance with the requirements herein. Neither the A/E’s nor Owner’s review and comments shall indicate approval or disapproval of the schedule. Since the schedule is dependent on the Contractors proprietary information and commitments, the A/E and Owner cannot, and will not, warrant the schedule to be correct and sufficient to meet the required contract time(s).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to A/E, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Coordinating Contractor

1. Review Assigned Contractors’ submittals within 5 business days.

a. Verify field dimensions. b. Verify compliance with Contract requirements.

2. Certify review. 3. Transmit reviewed submittals to Architect/Engineer. 4. Maintain a master list of submittals.

B. Each Contractor

1. Make submittals to Coordinating Contractor. Coordinating contractor shall maintain a master list of submittals.



B. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

C. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

D. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

E. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

F. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in submittal information at the end of this section as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in submittal information at the end of this section as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, based on the submittal information at the end of this section arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review as indicated in 1.5 C of this section, and for, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval based on the time line

indicated in 1.5 C of this section.


g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect as much as practical and as deemed by the Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit 2015.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement attached at the end of this section

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on submittal information at the end of this section

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as indicated in the submittal information at the end of this section. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 (fifteen) days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.


D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). See attached submittal information at the end of this section.

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.


2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in the submittal information at the end of this section.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements.


h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. f. Provide scanned picture of sample and submit for record only.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.


4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed


before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

M. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit [digitally signed PDF electronic file] [sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.


3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. If prior approval has not been requested and approved architect will take no action.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1


SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Each Contractor:

1. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. a. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

b. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

c. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

d. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

2. Employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory to perform specified services.



B. Section 012100 "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.


C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.



A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of commencement of work, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

C. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:


1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

D. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

E. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.


C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according


to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups, do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.


4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor[, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order].

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences,


examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1


SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Provide and maintain specified temporary utilities as required during construction period:

a. Payment of all utility and fuel bills, except charges specifically identified as the responsibility of other Contractors.

b. Temporary heat. c. Temporary ventilation. d. Temporary toilets.

2. Make arrangements with Owner’s Representative for the use and protection of existing facilities and utilities.

a. The project will be constructed at an occupied facility. b. The Owner will occupy area(s) adjacent to the Work for the purpose of continuing

food preparation and service operations. c. Schedule early completion of designated area(s) for Using Agency’s usage prior to

substantial completion of entire project. Refer to section 011000 “Summary” for phasing requirements.

d. Schedule noisy or hazardous work to avoid problems with Using Agency’s operations.

e. Coordinate use and maintenance of existing construction aids and entrances. f. Meeting space (On campus facility)

1) Coordinate and schedule meeting space usage with Owner’s Representative. g. Supervise and coordinate cleaning operations of all Assigned Contractors. h. Upon completion of need to use existing user-provided facilities, or when directed

by Architect/Engineer, restore each to original or specified condition. i. At completion of work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a

condition suitable for use of User.

3. Provide and maintain construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:

a. Chutes.


b. Cranes. c. Hoists. d. Platforms. e. Railings. f. Runways. g. Stairs. h. Temporary enclosures.

4. Maintain and coordinate vehicular access to site and on-campus staging areas.

a. Coordinate necessary lane closures and traffic control of existing roadways and sidewalks with the City of Normal and Illinois State University.

b. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required. c. Restore grounds to original conditions.

5. Provide and maintain all temporary site enclosures and barriers.

a. Maintain fences and barriers during entire construction period. Relocate and/or remove as construction progresses.

6. Make arrangements with Owner’s Representative for storage of materials and equipment to be installed in project.

a. Coordinate material and equipment storage requirements of all Contractors and make arrangements with Owner’s Representative.

b. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site is solely each contractor’s responsibility.

B. Plumbing Contractor:

1. Provide and maintain specified temporary utilities during construction period.

a. Temporary water service, including initial hookup or connection charges.

C. Electrical Contractor:

1. Provide and maintain specified temporary utilities during construction period.

a. Temporary power, including service hookup and connection charges. b. Temporary lighting (work, security, safety and lamps).

D. Each Contractor: 1. Field office (Trailer)

a. Coordinate space and access requirements with Owner’s Representative. b. Each prime to provide own temporary office space and any associated temporary

services.

2. All utilities required in excess of those specified, or exceed capacity of existing or permanent system(s).

3. Hoses and fittings from temporary standpipes or water service connection. 4. Drinking water for own forces.


5. Cellular phone service for site superintendents and project managers in own forces. 6. Make arrangements with Owner’s Representative for construction parking. All costs

associated with both on and off campus parking shall be included in each contractor’s base bid.

7. Provide and maintain storage for materials and equipment to be installed in Project. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site is solely contractor’s responsibility.

8. Provide and maintain construction aids for his own forces all other construction aids required to complete his work.


A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

B. Furnished by others:

1. Owner will authorize use of existing facilities or services for temporary use.

a. Heating. b. Ventilating. c. Electrical power service. d. (Work, security, safety) lighting. e. Water service. f. Toilets.

2. Owner will pay all costs of consumables used for construction purposes for utilities it furnishes.

3. Contractor requiring Owner furnished services provide and pay for extension or modification of services to perform the work, and for restoration of services at completion of work.

4. Owner will provide space within the existing building for field offices and scheduled progress meetings. Coordinate final locations with Owner.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Temporary Heat: Provision, operation and maintenance of approved portable heating devices, including costs of fuel, from start of construction until the permanent enclosure has been certified by the A/E as substantially complete and the permanent heating system, including permanent metered fuel line (except electric) is, in the A/E's and installing contractor's opinion, sufficiently complete to allow safe operation, and Owner gives written authorization for its use.


B. Temporary Ventilation: Provision, operation and maintenance of approved portable fans, louvers, ductwork, dampers necessary from start of construction until the permanent enclosure has been certified as substantially complete, and the permanent ventilating system is in the A/E's and installing contractor's opinion, sufficiently complete to allow safe operation, and Owner gives written authorization for its use.

C. Temporary Enclosure: Sufficient enclosure of an area, structure or building to prevent entrance or infiltration of rainwater, wind or other natural elements, and which will prevent undue heat loss from within enclosed areas.

D. Permanent Enclosure: Stage of construction at which all moisture and weather protection elements of construction have been installed in accord with the contract for the building or part thereof. The A/E may certify in writing that the building or defined portion thereof is substantially permanently enclosed when walls, windows, and roof are complete and openings left for construction access are adequately closed with movable material having an “R” value equivalent to the finished opening.

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF TEMPORARY UTILITY SYSTEMS

A. Heating System:

1. Provide specified temporary heating in enclosed areas throughout construction period in order to:

a. Facilitate progress of work by all contractors. b. Protect work and products against dampness and cold. c. Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces. d. Provide specified ambient temperatures for installation and curing of finish

materials.

2. Minimum heating temperatures: a. Minimum temperatures shall be at least that specified in specific specification

sections. b. Unless otherwise specified, areas in temporary enclosures shall be maintained at

temperatures of at least 45 degrees F (7.22 degrees C), 24 hours per day, seven days per week.

c. Unless otherwise specified, areas in permanent enclosures or during placement of interior finishes (woodwork, flooring, painting, drywall, etc.) shall be maintained at temperatures of at least 65 degrees F (18.3 degrees C), 24 hours per day, seven days per week.

B. Ventilation System:

1. Provide specified temporary ventilation in enclosed areas throughout construction period to:

a. Facilitate progress of work. b. Protect work and products against dampness and heat. c. Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.


d. Provide suitable ventilation for installation and curing of finish materials. e. Provide adequate ventilating to meet health regulations for safe working

environment. f. Prevent hazardous accumulations of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gases in areas

occupied during construction.

2. Duration of ventilation operations:

a. At all times personnel occupy an area, when subject to hazardous accumulations of harmful elements.

b. Continue operation of ventilating system after cessation of work to assure removal of harmful elements.

c. Continue until final air clearance (for asbestos abatement projects).

C. Electrical System:

1. Provide and maintain specified temporary primary electric power system throughout construction period.

a. Provide main distribution panel, complete with meter:

1) Capacity of:

a) 120/208 volts, 400 amps, 3 phase, 60 hertz.

2) Circuit protected feeders for:

a) Operation and testing of heating system (except electric heating). b) Operation and testing of ventilation system (except electric chillers). c) Pumping, dewatering. d) Specified secondary power centers. e) Temporary lighting. f) Elevators (one only).

3) All other connections are to be made at secondary power centers.

2. Provide secondary power centers for miscellaneous hand tools and equipment used in construction work.

a. Provide one on each floor. b. Provide weatherproof distribution boxs in quantity below on separate circuit with

grounded outlets: 1) Quantity 12, (120 volt, 20 amperes, 1 phase, 60 hertz).

c. Provide circuit protection for each circuit. d. Provide ground fault protection for each circuit. e. Each contractor and each subcontractor using the secondary power centers shall

provide their own grounded, UL listed extension cords and other accessories from secondary power centers to the point of operation.

3. Contractors who require primary power, secondary power centers or service connections in excess of that specified may, at their option:


a. Make arrangements with Electrical Contractor for excess service and pay all associated costs, including consumables, or

b. Make arrangements with Power Company for separate service and pay all costs thereof, including consumables.

4. Power source:

a. Utility company: Illinois State University b. Prior to availability of utility company service, provide specified power by means

of portable power plants.

D. Lighting

1. Provide temporary lighting for:

a. Construction needs. b. Safety lighting. c. Security lighting.

2. Security lighting:

a. Within the buildings, illuminate all stairways, corridors and entrances on a 24 hour per day basis.

b. Outside the building(s) provide:

1) An illuminated route from site entrance to project area for security guard or emergency access.

2) Site lighting controlled by photoelectric cell. 3) Illumination of all main electrical switching equipment, other equipment for

which emergency access is specified.

3. Safety Lighting

a. Provide 10 footcandles throughout all work areas.

4. Basic requirements, all lighting:

a. Lamps:

1) Covered with safety guard or deeply recessed in reflector. 2) Not suspended by their electric cords unless cord and fixture designed for

that purpose.

5. Contractors or subcontractors who require lighting in excess of that specified: Make arrangements with Electrical Contractor and pay all costs thereof.

E. Water service:

1. Provide and maintain temporary water service throughout construction period.


a. For construction purposes:

1) Provide service standpipe. 2) Provide a 1inch water service connection on each floor or where shown on

drawings. 3) Provide backflow protection. 4) Each contractor and subcontractor shall provide their own water hoses from

hose bibbs to point of his operations.

2. For other purposes:

a. Cleaning.

b. Nonpotable water:

1) Use only where permitted (dust control). 2) Identify outlets for nonpotable water with signs to indicate clearly that water

is unsafe. Do not use for drinking, washing or cooking purposes.

3. Water Source:

a. Supplier: : Illinois State University b. Prior to availability of regular source of supply, provide and pay for trucked-in

service. c. Provide temporary elevated storage tanks on site.

F. Toilets:

1. Provide temporary toilet facilities for use of all workmen and authorized parties throughout construction period.

2. Provide a minimum number of enclosed combination toilet and urinal units for construction personnel:

a. One for every 20 employees, or fraction thereof.

1.5 USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEMS FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Obtain Owner’s prior written authorization for system to be used. Request for authorization shall indicate:

1. Reason for use. 2. Conditions of use. 3. Parts of system to be used. 4. Modifications necessary. 5. Isolation of elements not authorized for use. 6. Approval of installing contractor; (and equipment manufacturer where extended

warranties are involved.)

B. Modifications necessary shall be at contractor's expense, since use of permanent systems is for contractor's benefit.


C. Upon completion of need to use permanent system, or when directed by A/E restore permanent system to specified condition prior to substantial completion. 1. Provide all new filters in heating and ventilating systems. 2. Replace all burned out or defective lamps. 3. Repair or restore all damaged parts or components. 4. Clean all ducts and coils. 5. Rebalance the heating/ventilating systems as required by A/E

D. Owner's authorization for use of permanent systems will not relieve Contractors' responsibility for warranties in accordance with the General Conditions.

E. NOTE: The above does not prohibit installing contractor from normal test and check out of system.

1.6 USE OF USING AGENCY'S EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Make written arrangements with Owner’s representative.

B. Modify, supplement and extend system to meet temporary utility requirements for project, subject to approval of Architect/Engineer and Owner.

C. Limitations:

1. Do not overload systems. When project requirements exceed system capacity, provide separate system to meet needs.

2. Prevent interference with Owner’s normal use of system.

D. Maintain strict supervision of use of temporary facilities. 1. Enforce conformance with Using Agency's regulations. 2. Use only designated facilities, systems or portions thereof.

E. Upon completion of need to use existing systems, or when directed by Architect/Engineer, restore existing systems to specified permanent condition.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.


1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and] ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 FIELD OFFICES

A. General: All prime contractors shall provide prefabricated or mobile unit with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading if desired.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:


1. Provide furniture required for project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Drinking water.

C. Owner will authorize use of existing space for construction meetings. Make arrangements with Owner's Representative.

2.3 STORAGE

A. Make arrangements with Owner's Representative for any on-site or on-campus storage of materials and equipment to be installed in project. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment is solely each contractor’s responsibility.

2.4 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

2.5 PARKING

A. Use designated areas of University existing parking areas for construction personnel. One parking space will be allowed per prime contractor on campus.

B. Additional parking is available in the town of Normal garage on the corner of S Fell and Beaufort Street. Contact the town of Normal for pricing.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Heating and Ventilating: Locate units to meet project progress, and as approved by Architect/Engineer. Avoid interference with:

1. Work or traffic areas. 2. Materials handling or storage areas. 3. Stairwells, access ramps and ladders.

C. Electrical:

1. Do not run branch circuits on floor or on ground. 2. Verify proper operation of all safety devices.

D. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

1. Do not run piping on floor or on ground. 2. Provide drip pan under each water service connection located within the building. 3. Provide insulation, or other means, to prevent pipes from freezing. 4. When necessary to maintain pressure, provide temporary pumps, tanks and compressors.

F. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Service regularly.


A. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Avoid interference with:

1. Work or traffic areas. 2. Materials handling or storage areas. 3. Stairwells, access ramps and ladders.

B. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Areas: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

C. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

2. Avoid interference with:

a. Work or traffic areas. b. Materials handling or storage areas. c. Stairwells, access ramps and ladders.

D. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Do not run branch circuits on floor or on ground. 2. Verify proper operation of all safety devices.

E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.


1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

F. Cellular Telephone Service:

1. Each contractor shall provide superintendent and project manager with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide temporary shop and material storage space. Coordinate staging location with Owner. All storage may not be located directly adjacent to project site.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 3. Provide and operate traffic control and directional signals in all areas under Coordinating

Contractor’s control. 4. Provide traffic control in accord with appropriate articles in the IDOT Standard

Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 700, and National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices including the Illinois Supplement.

C. Parking: Coordinate construction parking location and quantity with Owner. 1. Any cost associated with construction parking shall be included in each contractor’s base

bid.

2. Construction Parking Control: Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by emergency vehicles, using agency's operations or other construction operations.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.


a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

H. Existing Elevator Use: Use of existing elevators is not permitted.

I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

J. Temporary Use of Permanent Elevator: Use of new elevator for construction traffic will be permitted, provided elevator is protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction, and requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

D. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to authorities having jurisdiction.


1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

E. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.

Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.


a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at

Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.


D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Installing contractor shall maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Permanent systems shall be maintained by installing contractor so as to prevent any damage thereto.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."


EXECUTION 017300 - 1


SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Survey and Construction layout.

1. Each Contractor lay out the work under their contract.

2. Architect/Engineer will furnish:

a. A certified metes and bounds description and topographic survey of the site, giving all grades and lines of streets, alleys, pavements, and adjoining properties, rights-of-way, encroachments, boundaries, and contours of the building site.

b. Locations, dimensions and data pertaining to the existing:

1) Buildings. 2) Underground Obstructions. 3) Trees and Landscaping. 4) Utilities 5) Pavements.

B. Installation of the Work (Each Contractor).

C. Cutting and patching (Each Contractor)

1. Execute cutting (including excavating), filling or patching of work to:

a. Install specified work. b. Remove samples of installed work specified for testing. c. Remove and replace defective work.

2. In addition, upon written instructions of Architect/Engineer or Owner

a. Uncover work to provide for observation of covered work. b. Remove samples of installed materials for testing. c. Remove work to provide for alteration of existing work.

3. Do not cut or alter work of another contractor without written consent of Architect/Engineer.

4. Payment for costs:


a. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective work, or work not conforming to contract documents, including costs for additional services of Architect/Engineer: Party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non-conforming work.

b. Work done on instructions of Architect/Engineer (by change order), other than defective or non-conforming work: Owner.

D. Progress Cleaning

1. Coordinating Contractor: Supervise and coordinate cleaning operations of all assigned Contractors. Should any contractor fail to provide cleaning, then the coordinating contractor may provide it and back charge the assigned contractors a proportion of the costs.

2. Each Contractor: Provide regular cleaning and disposal of construction waste from the project site. Provide covered containers for deposit of waste and rubbish.

E. Starting and adjusting

1. Coordinating Contractor: Coordinate and facilitate scheduling of all demonstrations and testing.

2. Each Contractor: Conduct a thorough and systematic performance test of each element and total system in the presence of the A/E and Using Agency. Demonstrate that all systems comply with the requirements of the contract documents. Test all control, alarm and specialty systems including boilers, chillers, motor controls, building automation, power distribution, lighting, compressors, standby power and special mechanical systems. Correct or adjust all deficiencies in operation and retest as directed by A/E.

F. Protection of Installed Construction

1. Each Contractor: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



B. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

C. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

D. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

E. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.

F. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Prior to cutting which affects structural members or work of another contractor, submit written notice to Architect/Engineer requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including:

1. Project identification. 2. Description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting. 4. Effect on other work, on structural integrity of project. 5. Description of proposed work. Designate:

a. Scope of cutting and patching. b. Contractor and Crafts to execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing.

6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting and patching.

B. Prior to cutting and patching done on instruction of Architect/ Engineer, submit cost estimate.

C. When conditions of work, or schedule, indicate change of materials or methods, submit recommendation to Architect/Engineer, including:

1. Condition indicating change. 2. Recommendation for alternative materials or methods. 3. Submittals specified for substitutions.

D. Submit written notice to Architect/Engineer, designating time work will be uncovered, to provide for observation.

E. Owner or the Architect/Engineer may at any time require written verification of grades, lines, and levels by a licensed surveyor as work progresses. If requested, submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications:

1. A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.


2. Five years of experience in layout of similar or more difficult complexity.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.


D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.


D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.


D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.


F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This article applies to installation of new work, remodeling, testing and uncovering of potentially defective work. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, each contractor will provide its own cutting and patching.

B. Prior to cutting which affects structural members, safety of project, or work of other contractors or subcontractors, submit written notice to A/E.

C. Provide shoring, bracing and support. Protect other portions of the project, and provide protection from elements.

D. Restore work which has been cut or removed. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish.

E. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

F. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

G. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

H. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction.


I. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

J. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION CLEANING

A. Provide regular cleaning and disposal of construction waste from the project site. Provide covered containers for deposit of waste and rubbish.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawlspaces, and other closed spaces, prior to closing the space.

C. Clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing. Maintain to protect new finishes.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

F. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction


in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

G. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1


SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Collect and review Contractor substantial completion submittals as outlined in this section for completeness. Forward completed submittals to A/E for review.

a. The A/E will make a preliminary inspection within seven (7) business days after receipt of Contractor's notice. If A/E determines that work is substantially complete, the A/E will schedule a substantial completion inspection to be attended by the Using Agency, Owner’s Representative, A/E, and contractors.

2. Collect and review Contractor final completion submittals as outlined in this section for completeness. Make final inspection with Contractor to verify completion of punch list items. Forward completed submittals to A/E for review.

a. The A/E will make final inspection with each Contractor to verify completion. When A/E considers that all work is finally complete, contract closeout documents shall be prepared.

3. Collect and review Contractor executed warranty and bond submittals as outlined in this section for completeness. Forward completed submittals to A/E for review.

4. Supervise and coordinate the cleaning operations of all Assigned Contractors.

a. At project completion, leave project clean, ready for occupancy.

B. Each Contractor:

1. Substantial Completion:

a. When Contractor considers work substantially complete, and after building commissioning and training, submit written notice that work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. Include a Contractor prepared list of items to be completed or corrected along with all submittals required for substantial completion: record of user training and commissioning, operating and maintenance data, guarantees, warranties and bonds, keys, and keying schedule. Submit written notices to Coordinating Contractor for submittal to A/E.


2. Final Completion:

a. The Contractor shall submit written declaration that the work complies with all aspects of contract documents and that all items on substantial completion punch list have been completed. Certify that all adjustments to materials, equipment or systems as a result of building commissioning, are complete. Remove all tools, construction equipment and surplus materials. Submit written notices to Coordinating Contractor for submittal to A/E.

3. Warranty:

a. Each Contractor warrants that all work provided under the contract will be in conformance with the contract and free from defects in workmanship, materials, and equipment for a period of one year or such longer period as may be specified in the contract documents, except as provided below. Warranty time periods shall commence with the date of Owner acceptance of the certificate of substantial completion of the whole, or any part of the project. The warranty time period for any incomplete or uncorrected work including punch list work at the time of substantial completion shall commence with the date of final completion.

b. Extended Warranties: The responsible Contractor warrants that its workmanship, materials and equipment for those building systems subject to seasonal loads will be in conformance with the contract and free from defects for a period of two years, commencing with the date of the certificate of substantial completion. This includes, but is not limited to, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, temperature control and test and balance work, as specified in the project manual.

c. Latent Defects: On demand by Owner at any time within the ten year period following substantial completion or final acceptance, if applicable, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace all defective or non-conforming work resulting from, or constituting, latent defects, fraud, fraudulent concealment or gross negligence. Owner will give timely notice of such defects.

d. Prompt Repair: Upon notice from Owner or along with the Using Agency of such defects or non-conforming work, the Contractor shall promptly visit the site in the company of Owner's or the Using Agency's representative to determine the extent of all defects or nonconforming work. The Contractor shall provide all labor, material and equipment to promptly repair or replace the defective or non-conforming work. The repair shall include all adjacent work not necessarily provided by the Contractor but damaged as a result of such defects or non-conforming work or as a result of remedying them. If the Contractor does not promptly repair or replace defective or non-conforming work, Owner may repair or replace such work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. Work which is repaired or replaced by the Contractor shall be inspected and shall be warranted by the Contractor in accordance with this Article. The warranties set forth herein are in addition to all warranties or guarantees expressed or implied by operation of law, statute or ordinance.

e. Commercial Warranties: Each Contractor shall deliver all commercial warranties received from manufacturers prior to final completion but this shall not reduce Contractor's obligations under this Article.


f. Other Warranties: Owner may require the Contractor to furnish other warranties as specified in the Project Manual.

g. Submittal: Each Contractor shall assemble executed warranties and bonds. When contract is assigned, Contractor will send one original signed copy, bound with a table of contents to the Coordinating Contractor for submittal to A/E.

4. Final cleaning:

a. At completion of work, or at such other times as directed by the Coordinating Contractor, remove all waste, debris, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Clean all sight exposed surfaces; leave work clean and ready for occupancy.

5. Repair of the Work: Each Contractor shall meet the requirements of this section.



B. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.

C. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

D. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

E. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.


A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.


1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in section 013300 submittals, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in section 013300 submittals, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.


9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 15 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor’s are to refer to the supplemental general conditions for the number of inspections to be performed by the architect.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor’s are to refer to the supplemental general conditions for the number of inspections to be performed by the architect.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction


1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.


l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1


SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Review Assigned Contractors Operations & Maintenance Manuals for completeness. When deemed complete, forward to manuals to Architect/Engineer.

B. Each Contractor:

1. Compile data related to the maintenance and operation of products and equipment provided under the contract into an Operations & Maintenance Manual. Provide O & M information for products specified in specific work sections of the project manual. Submit two copies of each manual. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Send submittals to Coordinating Contractor for submittal to Architect / Engineer.



B. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts.

C. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.



A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in Specification Sections 013300 submittals to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to


ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.


F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.


8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures.


5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.


2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.


1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1


SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Each Contractor will maintain and deliver record documents, including as-built drawings, to Coordinating Contractor for submittal to A/E. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter. Include name and number of each record document and obtain a signed receipt


1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating project record documents covering the Work of multiple contracts.

3. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 4. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 5. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

1.3 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain, protect and keep current the following; one copy of contract drawings, project manual, addenda, approved shop drawings and product data, other modifications to contract, field test records, all schedules and correspondence file at site.

B. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.” Legibly record actual construction: depths of foundations; horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities, referenced to permanent surface improvements; location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction; field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by change order.


C. Make documents available at all times for inspection by A/E and Owner.

D. Submittal. When contract is assigned, Contractor will deliver record documents, including as-built drawings, to Coordinating Contractor for submittal to A/E. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter. Include name and number of each record document and obtain a signed receipt

E. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.


F. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

G. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Record Digital Data Files: Maintain e-transmitted folder structure and externally referenced links as provided by Architect. Provide tabular list of company letterhead identifying all modified electronic files.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file .

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.


B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1


SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Coordinating Contractor: Coordinate scheduling of training with Owner and A/E.

B. Each Contractor:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. 4. Coordinate scheduling of demonstration and training with Coordinating Contractor.




A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.


1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name of Architect/Engineer. c. Name of Contractor. d. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been submitted to Architect/Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:


1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments.


d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.


1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect through Coordinating Contractor with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 1080p video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format DVD disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.

4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents.


c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1


SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the work as specified in this section.

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

B. Base Bid: The Heating Prime Contractor shall remove refrigerant as specified in this section.

C. Base Bid: Each contractor shall provide all labor and materials for work pertaining their bid package as specified in this section.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

C. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.


E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.

D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.



A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Frozen and refrigerated food products.

b. Dry food products.

c. Shelving units and associated contents.

d. Food service equipment and non-fixed tables.

e. Existing furniture, computers, printers, and phones.

f. Files and file storage.

g. Carts and trash bins.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:

1. EPDM Roof.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

B. Refer to Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination” for phasing requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.


5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.


4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.

1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system as required to accommodate new penetrations and curbs.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.


3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03 00 00-1

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY FEHR-GRAHAM WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 755 SOUTH GRAND AVENUE WEST NORMAL, ILLINOIS SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS C-B PROJECT NUMBER: 14077 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 1, 2016 DIVISION 03- CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and

materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section. 1. Section includes:

a. Footings. b. Foundation walls. c. Slabs-On-Grade d. Composite Floor Deck


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Related requirements:

1. Section 31 20 00 “Earth Moving” for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 32 13 13 “Concrete Paving” for concrete pavement and walks.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

tweber

Text Box

3


B. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements, and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Include field test data used to establish the required average strength in accordance with ACI 301. Review of design mixes and field test data will be for general information only. Production of concrete to comply with specified requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until each mix has been reviewed by the Architect.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement prepared according to ACI 315 “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

F. Samples: For waterstop. G. Samples: For vapor retarder. H. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.

tweber

Text Box

3


J. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

K. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

L. Field quality-control reports. M. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,

Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,

"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

F. Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 302, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.” 4. ACI 305, “Hot Weather Concreting.” 5. ACI 306, “Cold Weather Concreting.”

tweber

Text Box

3


6. ACI 308, “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.” 7. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.” 8. ACI 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” 9. ASTM C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 10. AWS D12.1, “Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforced Steel, Metal Inserts and

Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction.” 11. CRSI, “Manual of Standard Practice.”

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1. Materials and installed Work may require testing and retesting, at anytime during the progress of the Work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner’s expense, including the retesting of rejected materials and installed Work, shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures

for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Independent testing agency responsible for the field quality control. d. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. e. Concrete subcontractor. f. Special concrete finish subcontractor. g. Architect.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, and concrete protection.

3. Type and print minutes from the meeting and distribute to all parties within 3 days of the

meeting. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other

contaminants. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

tweber

Text Box

3


A. Before commencing work, examine all adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for proper installation and workmanship and report to the Contractor any condition which prevents performing first class work.

B. Protection of Footings Against Freezing: Cover completed work at footing level with sufficient

temporary or permanent cover as required to protect footings and adjacent subgrade against possibility of freezing; maintain cover for time period as necessary.

C. Protect adjacent finish materials against spatter during concrete placement.

D. Provide all barricades and safeguards at all pits, holes, shaft and stairway openings, and the like.

Provide all safeguards as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Take full responsibility for safety precautions and methods.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Rust free metal. 2. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 3. Exterior-grade undamaged, unpatched plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms,

complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

4. Architecturally exposed concrete: medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release

agent treated and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient

to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

tweber

Text Box

3


G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form

ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of

exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter

in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or

waterproofing. 4. Furnish stainless steel ties where drawings indicate exposed.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn

steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel

bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed

zinc.

E. Mechanical Reinforcement Couplers: ASTM A-519, minimum tensile strength 100,000 psi.

F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

tweber

Text Box

3


1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire

bar supports. 3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar

supports. 4. Do not use wood, masonry, concrete or other similar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I (Type III cement may be used in lieu of Type I at Contractor’s option, when acceptable to the Architect).

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water soluble chloride ions by mass of cementatious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementatious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride thyocyanates and admixtures containing more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

tweber

Text Box

3


2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP. b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX. c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. d. Greenstreak; Swellstop. e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20. g. Adeka Ultra Seal; Mitsubishi International Corporation.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, 15mil with maximum 0.01 perm rating. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.


a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and

manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

tweber

Text Box

3


2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating.


a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB. e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal. f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18). g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II. h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX;

Clearseal WB 150. i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion. j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20. k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.

tweber

Text Box

3


l. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure. n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened

concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as

defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according

to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

tweber

Text Box

3


1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump

of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.

tweber

Text Box

3


B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump

of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.

C. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m). 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.44 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

D. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,

and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

tweber

Text Box

3


1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations

and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is

inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances

in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of

concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

tweber

Text Box

3


2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to

distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide

adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Place concrete slab on grade directly on the vapor retarder. 2. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3. Place vapor retarder sheeting with longest dimension parallel with the direction of the

concrete pour. 4. Seal around all penetrations and foundation walls, protection and repairs. 5. Use reinforcement supports that do not puncture vapor retarder.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would

reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1 Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

tweber

Text Box

3


D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating

according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in

girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders

and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls no more than 40 feet in any horizontal direction. Locate joints

beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially

hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into 15-foot maximum perpendicular strips, and areas not exceeding 225 square feet. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive

or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete within 24-hours after initial floating, when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete

surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

tweber

Text Box

3


3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate

or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved

by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and

in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface

plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

tweber

Text Box

3


F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for

three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled

mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint

to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

tweber

Text Box

3


3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or

inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and built-up or membrane roofing, or

sand-bed terrazzo.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere

as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green

and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

tweber

Text Box

3


3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 301, ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305 R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,

and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,

including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces

and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor

coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover

or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging

concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

tweber

Text Box

3


4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces

of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2

inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

tweber

Text Box

3


1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Architect will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. Contractor shall cooperate with testing and inspection agency in performance of these duties.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

tweber

Text Box

3


C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure three sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

tweber

Text Box

3


12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)

within 24 hours of finishing. Test one sample area for each slab area required to have a floor flatness, F(F) or floor levelness, F(L) greater than 25.

3.17 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00

tweber

Text Box

3

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035416 - 1


SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section.

1. Section includes polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 090561.13 “Moisture Vapor Emission Control” for compatibility with moisture vapor emission control systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.



A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.


a. ARDEX Americas; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. b. Dayton Superior; LeveLayer. c. MAPEI Corporation; Ultraplan 1 Plus.

2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

E. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.


B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust, foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosion-resistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and between coats.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. If aggregate is required, apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.


F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.


CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1


SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes: a. Concrete masonry units. b. Mortar and grout. c. Steel reinforcing bars. d. Masonry-joint reinforcement. e. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.


1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.

1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2500 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.


3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions.

2.4 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

E. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: Ladder type complying with ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet , with prefabricated corner and tee units.


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other

applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.


7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.


3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells

are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes.

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

2. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 3. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.

D. Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

F. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

G. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 2 inches wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.

horizontally.


3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

3.8 LINTELS

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.


B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 10 00-1

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY FEHR-GRAHAM. WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 755 SOUTH GRAND AVENUE WEST NORMAL, ILLINOIS SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS C-B PROJECT NUMBER: 14077 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 1, 2016 DIVISION 5 – METALS SECTION 05 10 00 – STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to the furnishing and installation of all structural metal framing and accessories, complete, in place, as shown on the drawings, specified herein and needed for a complete and proper installation.

1. Structural steel framing members and structural steel support members with

bracing, welding and fasteners. 2. Base plates, anchor bolts and bearing plates.



1.3 RELATED WORK A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 03 30 00 – Cast-in place concrete 2. 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry

3. 05 21 00 – Steel Joist Framing 4. 05 31 00 – Steel Decking

5. 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 6. 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications of:

1. Steel Fabricator: Not less than five years documented experience in the fabrication of structural steel.

2. Steel Erector: Not less than five years documented experience in the erection of structural steel.

3. Welding procedures, welders, welding operations and tackers: Qualified in accord with AWS Building Code.


B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Building code: International Building Code, 2012 Edition, governs the work. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Tests: a. Certificates of conformance for: 1) Structural steel tubing and shapes (Mill Test Certificates). 2) Filler metals for welding.

3) Shop paint primer.

D. Connection Design:

1. Where connection details are not specifically shown on the drawings, the fabricator shall design the connection for the capacity of the member as shown in the AISC Manual, Part 2, Beam Tables.

2. Develop connection details for field welding of structural tubes which will provide for a clean, smooth, high quality, architectural grade exposed finish at the weld joints. Grind field welded surfaces which are exposed to a smooth, seamless appearance.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Specified references, or cited portions thereof, current at date of bidding documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work.

B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings, ANSI/AISC 360-10. 2. Code of Standard Practice including Section – Architecturally exposed structural

steel.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A36 – Specification for Structural Steel. 2. A53 – Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless. 3. A307 – Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard

Fasteners. 4. A325 – Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 5. A500 – Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 6. A501 – Specifications for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 7. A572 – Specifications for Structural Steel – Grade 50.


D. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1 Code for Welding in Building Construction. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accord with 013300.

1. Submit shop drawings indicating all shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, rivets and welds.

2. Indicate all welds, both shop and field, by AWS “Welding Symbols”. 3. Submit stud placement layout plan showing all beams, number of studs and stud

spacing. 4. Contractor to thoroughly check shop drawings before submittal to A/E. Shop

drawings shall be original drawings prepared by the Contractor. Reproduction of the contract documents will not be acceptable.

B. Erection procedure: Submit descriptive data to illustrate the structural steel erection

procedure, including the sequence of erection and temporary staying and bracing. Submittal shall be for review only. Safety and procedures are solely the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Welding Procedure: Submit written description to illustrate each welding procedure to be

performed in the specified work.

D. Manufacturer’s literature: Submit description of each type of welding stud and arc shield.

E. For each type and each manufacturer of high- strength bolts, nuts and rivets, submit:

1. Manufacturer’s name and address. 2. Mill Test Certificates.

F. Certificates: Submit certificates for the inspection tests specified in paragraph 1.3. C.

G. Welder’s certification: Submit current welding certifications, in accord with AWS, for

each welder and each type of weld to be performed in the specified work.

H. Illinois Steel Product Procurement Act, as amended (30 ILCS 565/1 et seq.)

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protection:

1. Deliver products to the site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the work.

2. Store structural steel members at the project site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports.

3. Store other material in a weather tight and dry place, until ready for use in the work.

4. Stored packaged materials in their original unbroken package or container.


1.9 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate erection of structural metal frame with other trades and crafts whose work may be affected or have effect.

1.10 WARRANTY A. In accord with General Conditions: One year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel wide flange: ASTM A572, Grade 50. 1. Other shapes, bars and plates: ASTM A36. B. Structural Steel Tubing: Fy 46 ksi steel: ASTM A500, Grade B.

C. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B.

D. Standard Threaded Fasteners:

1. Standard bolts and nuts: ASTM 307, Grade A. 2. Plain washers: ANSI B 18.22.1.

E. Anchor Bolts: Conform to Section 1c of ASTM A307. F. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A325.

G. Filler Metals for Welding: Shielded metal-arc welding and submerged arc welding: Comply with referenced AWS Code.

H. HEADED STUDANCHORS: Comply with requirements of the Structural Welding code

– Steel (AWS D1.1) I. Shop Paint Primer:

1. Unexposed structural steel – standard primer, SSPC Paint 13. 2. Architecturally exposed structural steel – See Section 09900 – Painting.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate Structural Steel in accord with the AISC specifications and the modifications and additional requirements specified in this section.

1. Where a conflict occurs between the standards specified above, notify A/E

immediately. Confirm notification in writing. Do not proceed with fabrication until receiving A/E’s written instructions.


a. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by f\burning nor will the burning of

unfair holes in the shop or field be acceptable. Holes shall be provided in members to permit connecting items specified in other sections of these specifications.

b. Fit structural members correctly and rectify in an approved manner, all errors of fabrication.

c. Substitution of sections, or modification of details or connections, shall be permitted only with the prior written approval of the A/E.

d. Copes and cut outs at ends of beams to be field welded shall not be enlarged in the field.

B. Shop Connections: Welded or bolted as detailed on the drawings.

C. Field Connections: Bolted or as detailed on the drawings.

1. At bolted connections, use high-strength threaded fasteners, ¾” inch

diameter A325. 2. Fabricate architecturally exposed steel in accordance with Section of the

AISC Code of Standard Practice.

D. High Strength Bolted Connection: Install bolts in properly aligned holes to a snug-tight condition. The snug-tight condition is the tightness that exists when all plies in a joint are in a firm contact. Connections are designed as Type N: Bearing – type connections with threads included in the shear plane.

E. Welded construction shall be limited to one or a combination o the following welding

processes. Stress relieve welded assemblies by heat treatment.

1. Manual shielded-arc. 2. Submerged arc.

F. Straightness of Structural Member:

1. Members: See Section 1.23.8.1B of AISC Specifications. 2. Straightness of architecturally exposed structural steel comply with AISC Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Steel.

G. Mill and attach column base plates to columns.

H. Bearing Plates: Provide bearing plates under beams, girders and trusses resting on

footings, piers, and walls.

I. Shop Painting: Shop paint all unexposed steel work except areas within 2” of field welds and contact surfaces using high-strength friction type bolts in accord with SSPC PS Guide 7.00.

1. Paint steel work using the following shop paint system:

a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP2. b. Visual standard of cleanliness: SSPC Vis 1 pictorial standards B


st. 2, C st 2 and D st 2. c. Pretreatment: None required. d. Paint application: SSPC PA 1. e. Paint: SSPC – Paint 13. f. Number of coats: One. g. Dry film thickness: Not less than 1.5 mils.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in accord with AISC specifications with modifications and additional requirements of this section.

B. Column Bases and Bearing Plates: Align attached column bases using double nuts with

wedges or shims as required.

1. Fully grout all aligned base plates using non-shrink grout as specified in 033000.

C. Erection tolerances: Erect individual pieces so that the deviation from plumb, level and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500.

D. Field Assembly: Do not commence erection until erection procedures outlined in

paragraph 1.05., B. Of this section has been submitted.

1. Accurately assemble structural steel frames to the lines and elevations indicated, within the specified erection tolerances.

2. Align and accurately adjust the various members forming parts of a complete frame or structure after being assembled before being fastened.

3. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact before members are assembled.

4. Splices will be permitted only where indicated. 5. Field connections: See “Fabrication”. 6. Erection bolts used in welded construction may be either tightened securely and

left in place or removed and the holes filled with plug welds.

E. Gas Cutting : Field correction of fabrication errors by gas cutting will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing without prior written approval of the A/E.

F. Field touch-up Painting: After the erection of structural steel, touch-up paint field

connections and abrasions in the shop paint coating with the same paint used for the shop drawings.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Testing Agency shall be hired and paid for by the Architect/Engineer.

1. Observe all bolted connections for conformance to the specifications. 2. Visual inspection of all field weld for conformance to AWS D1.1.


B. Inspection of Field Welds by the testing Agency will be in accord with AWS Building

Code D 1.1 as follows:

1. Visual inspection of all field welds in accord with Section 6.5.

C. Contractor to notify test laboratory when steel work is ready for inspection. END OF SECTION 05100

STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00-1

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY FEHR-GRAHAM WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 755 SOUTH GRAND AVENUE WEST NORMAL, ILLINOIS SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS C-B PROJECT NUMBER: 14077 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 1, 2016 DIVISION 5 – METALS SECTION 05 21 00 – STEEL JOISTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: General Contractor: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to the furnishing and installation of all structural metal framing and accessories, complete, in place, as shown on the drawings, specified herein and needed for a complete and proper installation.

1. General Contractor Provide: a. K-series, KCS-series and open-web steel joists and joist substitutes. b. Joist accessories. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.3 RELATED WORK A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

2. 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry 3. 05 10 00 – Structural Metal Framing

4. 05 31 00 - Steel Deck 5. 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications 6. 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect joists and connections to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required.

1. Design Loads: As indicated.


B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a joist manufacturer who utilizes a qualified structural engineer to prepare design calculations, erection plans, shop drawings, and other structural data for steel joists.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit each item in this Article according to the Standard Documents for Construction and Division 1 Specification Section 01340.

B. Product Data for each type of joist, accessory, and product specified.

C. Shop Drawings showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists.

Including joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories, splice and connection details, and attachments to other units of work.

1. For joists indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified structural engineer licensed to practice in the state of Illinois responsible for their preparation.

D. Material certificates signed by joist manufacturer certifying that joists comply with SJI’s

“Specifications.”

E. Submit manufacturer’s written certification, signed by an authorized company officer or its Attorney-In-Fact, certifying that all products comply with the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Manufacturer must be a member of SJI and be certified by SJI to manufacture

joists conforming to SJI standard specifications and load tables.

B. SJI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of SJI’s “Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders,” applicable to types of joists indicated.

C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1–94 “Structural

Welding Code--Steel” and AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel.”

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests or welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

D. Structural Engineer Qualifications: A structural engineer legally authorized to practice in

the state of Illinois where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.


E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, as amended (Illinois Statutes, ch. 48, par. 1801 et. seq.).

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended as SJI’s “Specifications.”

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers for steel joist:

1. Canam Steel Corp., Washington, MO. 2. Gooder-Henrichsen Co., Inc., Chicago Heights, IL 3. Socar, Inc., Florence, SC 4. Vulcraft, A Division of Nucor Corp., Fort Payne, AL 5. SMI Joist, Clinton, OK

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with requirements of SJI’s “Specifications” for chord and web section material.

B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568,

Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, noncoated.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide: Federal Specification TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer’s standard shop primer meeting the performance requirements of either of these red-oxide primers.

B. Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, VOC-compliant, universal modified-alkyd

primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.


2.4 STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture joists according to SJI’s “Specifications,” with steel angle top and bottom chord members, of joist types, end arrangements, and top chord arrangements indicated.

B. Manufacture joists according to SJI’s “Specifications,” with angle top and bottom chord

members, and as follows:

1. Joist Type: K-series and KCS-series steel joists. 2. Joist Substitutes: On short spans, where open web joists cannot be fabricated to

the required length, provide joist substitutes to support the required load condition.

C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other work to steel joists.

E. Camber K-series steel joists according to SJI’s “Specifications.”

F. Provide extended ends of bottom chords where indicated on drawings. 2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows diagonal or horizontal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI’s Specifications for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span.

B. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by the joist

manufacturer to complete the joist installation.

C. Provide sloped bearing plates at bearing locations to provide flat solid bearing for width as required by manufacturer and to avoid point contact bearing of joists.

2.6 SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories to be primed as follows:

1. Surface Preparation: Power tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film thickness of not less than 1 mil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and


other conditions affecting performance of joists. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION/ERECTION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI’s “Specifications,” joist manufacturer’s recommendations, and the requirements of this Section.

1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently

fastening. 2. Install temporary bracing and bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure joists

are stabilized during construction.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.

1. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. Install up lift bridging where shown.

E. Strengthen joists by adding angles as detailed when top chord or bottom chord loads are

applied more than 4” away from panel points. Angles to be supplied by steel fabrication and installed by joist erector. Welding shell be by certified welders.

3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touch Up Painting: Following installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power tool

cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent

surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


A. Inspection of Field Welds by the testing Agency will be in accord with AWS Building Code D 1.1as follows:

1. Periodic visual inspection of all field welds in accord with Section 6.5.


B. Contractor to notify test laboratory when steel work is ready for inspection.


STEEL DECK 05 31 00-1

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY FEHR-GRAHAM WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 755 SOUTH GRAND AVENUE WEST NORMAL, ILLINOIS SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS C-B PROJECT NUMBER: 14077 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 1, 2016

DIVISION 5 – METALS SECTION 05 31 00 – STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: General Contractor Provide: All labor, materials, equipment and services to the furnishing of all steel deck and accessories, complete, in place, as shown on the drawings, specified herein and needed for a complete and proper installation.

1. Composite steel floor deck and accessories. 2. Steel roof deck and accessories. 3. Framing for openings up to and including 12”.



1.3 RELATED WORK A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 01 34 00 – Shop drawings, project data and samples 2. 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete; for concrete fill.

3. 05 10 00 – Structural Metal Framing; for shop and field welded shear connectors 4. 05 21 00 – Steel Joists 5. 05 40 00 – Cold formed metal framing 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications:

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (ANSI) 2. American Welding Society (ANSI/AWS D1.3 Structural Welding

Code / Sheet Steel) 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI)

B. Regulatory requirements: The 2012 edition of the International Building Code govern

the work.


1.5 REFERENCES

A. Specified references, or cited portions thereof, current at date of bidding documents unless otherwise specified, govern the work. In conflict between referenced standards and contract documents, notify A/E immediately. Confirm notification in writing. Do not perform any further work until receiving A/E’s written instructions.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A572, Grade 50 – Spec for structural steel. 2. A611 or A653 – Spec for steel sheet structural (physical) quality.

C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1 – Code for Welding in Building Construction.

D. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof

Decks.

E. Manufacturer’s Catalogs: Specified MFR’s catalogs are incorporated by reference to same force and effect as if repeated here in, in full.

F. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI): Spec for the design of cold formed steel

structural members. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings: In accord with 01 34 00.

1. Contractor to thoroughly check shop drawings before submittal to A/E. Shop drawings shall be original drawings prepared by the Contractor. Reproduction of the contract documents will not be acceptable.

2. Deck layout, framing and supports with unit dimensions and sections. 3. Type and location fasteners. 4. Details of accessories, showing ridge and valley plates, closure strips and other

miscellaneous components. 5. Special conditions such as predetermined cut-outs for mechanical equipment.

B. Manufacturer’s literature: Recommended installation instructions.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in sufficient time and quantity to maintain approved Construction Schedule.

B. Store materials as follows:

1. Store decking on wood sleepers, off ground, with one end elevated for drainage. 2. Cover deck with waterproof materials and ventilate to avoid condensation. 3. Do not bend or mar decking

C. Handle materials in accord with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide proper

protection until materials are ready for installation.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers of Roof Deck: 1. Consolidated Systems, Inc., Columbia, SC 2. Vulcraft, Division of NUCOR Corp., St. Joe, IN 3. Wheeling Corrugating Company, Wheeling, WV 4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC, Butler, IN 5. Cordeck, Kenosha, WI

B. Manufacturers of Composite Floor Deck: 1. Consolidated Systems, Inc., Columbia, SC 2. Vulcraft, Division of NUCOR Corp., St. Joe, IN 3. Wheeling Corrugating Company, Wheeling, WV 4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC, Butler, IN 5. Cordeck, Kenosha, WI 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sheet steel: ASTM A611 or A653, minimum yield strength 33 KDI.

1. Steel deck manufacturer shall supply decking free of amounts of lubricants or oils which would impair the adhesion of spray-applied fireproofing.

B. Screws and fasteners: No. 10 steel screws of type recommended by deck manufacturer,

coated for corrosion protection.

C. Metal closure strips, cover plates and related accessories: 20 gage galvanized sheet steel, of indicated profiles and sizes.

D. Miscellaneous steel shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50. See Section 05100.

E. Manufacturers standard galvanized finish for 1 ½ inch deck.

F. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Metal Roof Decking

1. Metal roof decking, Type “B”: Minimum 22 gage sheet steel, galvanized finish, 1½ fluted profile to comply with SDI Type WR or IR; 30 or 36” wide sheets; 3 span, minimum; lapped joints.


2. Fabricate metal roof decking, in accord with SDI Design Manual for Roof Decks, to accommodate maximum working stress of 20,000 psi and maximum span deflection of 1/240 under full live load.

B. Composite Floor Deck, Minimum 22 gage sheet steel, 1½” x 6” fluted profile with

integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and nestible, uncoated

1. Fabricate panels, with concealed fasteners, or full-depth positive registering side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 3 span minimum and maximum span deflection of 1/360 under full live load.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect supporting members for correct layout and alignment.

B. Verify that surfaces to receive deck are free of debris.

C. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected.


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.


G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two

welds per deck unit at each support and as indicated on plans. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or as indicated on plans, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.


F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.

3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds

an average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart. 3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. 4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position.

B. Assure that construction loads do not exceed carrying capacity of deck.


A. The Testing Agency shall be hired and paid for by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Visual inspection of all field weld for conformance to AWS D1.1.


B. Inspection of Field Welds by the testing Agency will be in accord with AWS Building Code D 1.3 as follows:

1. Periodic visual inspection of all field welds.

C. Contractor to notify test laboratory when steel work is ready for inspection.


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1


SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections.

B. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated in structural drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:

a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:


a. Upward and downward movement of 1 inch (25 mm).

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Delegated Design Submittal: Design calculations and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."


F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. Allied Studco. 2. AllSteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc. 8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel. 10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc.


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST50H (ST340H). 2. Coating: G90 (Z275) or equivalent.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm). 2. Minimum Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch. 2. Minimum Flange Width: 2 inches.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries. c. SCAFCO Corporation d. The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.


2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.


C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.


G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: To match stud spacing.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.


H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches (1220 mm) maximum. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated, 16 inches (406 mm) O.C. maximum.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.


2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY FEHR-GRAHAM WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 755 SOUTH GRAND AVENUE WEST NORMAL, ILLINOIS SPRINGFIELD, ILLINOIS C-B PROJECT NUMBER: 14077 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 1, 2016 DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes:

a. Shop and field fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted,

including, but not limited to:

1) Steel lintels, railing, plates, bollards, etc. 2) Bent plates at header supports

3) Miscellaneous metal fabrications as shown

b. Miscellaneous anchors, brackets, fasteners, accessories and additional items as required for complete installation of metal fabrications.

c. Miscellaneous steel fabrications for supports of sunscreens. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.3 RELATED WORK A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

2. 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry 3. 05 10 00 – Structural Metal Framing

4. 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal 5. 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install miscellaneous steel items to withstand structural loads shown, if any, without exceeding the allowable design working


stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component.


A. Qualifications of Fabricator: Minimum 3 years documented experience in successful fabrication of metal work of comparable size and complexity as this project.

B. Engineer Qualifications: Professional structural engineer registered to practice in the

State of Illinois experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for design ad installation of metal stairs similar to this project in material, design and extent, and that have a record of successful inservice performance.

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and

fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.

D. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field

splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, all accessories and finishes.

2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net

weld lengths. 4. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a professional structural engineer registered

in the State of Illinois.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data on manufactured items or components.


A. Field Measurements: Check actual location of foundation walls, floor openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

B. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.

C. Coordinate miscellaneous anchors with structural steel and concrete subcontractors.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Surface:

1. For fabrication of miscellaneous metal to be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

2. For sheet materials, do not use materials with pitting, seam marks, roller marks, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet, stains, discoloration, or other imperfections.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500-80, Grade B; hot rolled ASTM A501-80.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads, galvanized finish for exterior locations.

E. Gray Iron: ASTM A48 Class 35B.

F. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade as follows: 1. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows:

a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.

2. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570, grade as follows:

a. Grade 30, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.

3. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of

manufacturer) as follows:

a. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366. b. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569.

4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Quality as follows:

a. Structural Quality: ASTM A 446; Grade A, G 90 (Z 275) coating, unless

otherwise indicated, or unless another grade is required for design loading.

b. Commercial Quality: ASTM A 526, G 90 (Z 275) coating designation, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fasteners: Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior

walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307 Grade


2. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 3. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; use correct type for materials being welded.

I. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and

finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade as selected.

K. Primer:

1. Metal Primer Paint: Rustoleum 769; Pittsburgh Paints Multiprime 97-684; Tnemec 10-1008.

2. Primer selected must be compatible with finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of primer with finish paint requirements of Section 09900.

3. Provide metal primer on sunscreen steel plate brackets compatible with powder coated finishes.

L. Miscellaneous Angles and Channels: Provide as shown on drawings or required for

fabrication of miscellaneous metal items.

M. Dissimilar Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, insert lead washers, spacers, gaskets, or other separation as required to provide electrolytic insulation.

N. Grout: Nonshrink, nonferrous grout - CE CR D C621.

2.2 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.

B. Use material of size and thickness shown. If not shown, provide required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or approved on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrications and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.

C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight

sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separations or otherwise impairing work.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At

exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints; flush and smooth, using concealed

fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not shown, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate exposed mechanical fasteners unobtrusively, consistent with design of structure.


F. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

G. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish

hardware and similar items.

H. Supply all components for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.3 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. C. Galvanized loose steel lintels to be located in exterior walls. 2.4 FINISH A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint ferrous items with one coat.

D. Galvanize items located in contact with the exterior or with exterior construction. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which miscellaneous metal items will be installed. Start of work indicates acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s written approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments

not scheduled.

C. Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where welding is scheduled.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Completely fabricate all miscellaneous metal items. Include all parts, complete with bolts, anchor clips, etc., ready for installation. Erect all work to the proper lines and elevations in correct relation to the adjoining work.


B. Unless otherwise shown, secure miscellaneous metal items by means of field bolting, welding, expansion bolts, cinch anchors or similar connections. Conceal methods of attachment wherever possible.

C. Fastening to in-place construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, wood screws and other connections as required.

D. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as required for

installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld

connections which will not be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and tough-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedure of manual shielded metal-arc

welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.

G. After installation, touch-up field welds, scratched or damaged surfaces with primer.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Provide items listed in schedule and shown on drawings, complete with anchorage and attachments required for complete installation.

B. Schedule is a list of principal items only. See drawing details for items not specifically

scheduled.

C. Schedule of Metal Fabrication Items: 1. Steel beams and columns. 2. Miscellaneous steel shapes, prime painted, as shown.


METAL PAN STAIRS 055113 - 1


SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes

a. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. b. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. c. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. d. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.



A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes. 2. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Lapeyre Stair Inc. 4. Pacific Stair Corporation. 5. Worthington Metal Fabricators.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:


1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor: As indicated in structural drawings.

2.3 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

D. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.


C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

D. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.

E. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.


3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed

for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch.

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they are

concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with

reinforced concrete during fabrication. 5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits.

2.8 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.


1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch-diameter top and bottom rails and 1-5/8-inch-round posts. 2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- round pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear. 3. Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to match

guards. Provide with cam-type, self-closing hinges for fastening to wall and overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction opposite egress.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.

2. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."


C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail

ends and anchored with post installed anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.


3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.


METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 1


SECTION 055119 - METAL GRATING STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes exterior industrial-type, straight-run stairs with steel-grating treads and railings attached to metal grating stairs.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 055113 “Metal Pan Stairs” for interior preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads and associated railings.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs and the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.


B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments.


A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360.

C. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor: As indicated in structural drawings.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.


B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.

F. Cast-Abrasive Nosings: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.


2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

C. Weld connections to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

D. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.

C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.

2. Surface: Serrated. 3. Finish: Galvanized. 4. Fabricate grating treads with cast-abrasive nosing and with steel angle or steel plate

carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. 5. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide toeplates

at open-sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing.


2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch-diameter top and bottom rails and 1-5/8-inch-round posts. 2. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-5/8-inch- diameter intermediate rails spaced less than 21

inches clear.

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.


B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.


A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1


SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section Includes:

a. Wood blocking and nailers. b. Plywood backing panels.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for fire-treated roof sheathing.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.

C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.



A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.


3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade;

NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.


2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES evaluation report as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.


E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


SHEATHING 061600 - 1


SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section Includes:

a. Wall sheathing. b. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.



1.3 RELATED WORK:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for fire-treated plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements. 3. Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers" for fluid-applied, vapor

retarding membrane air barrier applied over wall sheathing including sheathing joint and penetration treatment.

4. Section 074213.23 “Metal Composite Material Wall Panels” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

1. Approved NFPA 285 Assembly: The collection of exterior enclosure components and accessory materials identified, installed and tested together as an entire exterior wall assembly per NFPA 285. An approved assembly must meet or exceed the testing requirements of NFPA 285



A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F shall be not less than span ratings specified.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.


E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 WALL SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing. b. National Gypsum Company; eXP Fire-Shield Type X. c. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Brand Glass-Mat Sheathing Firecode X.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 120 inches for vertical installation. 4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly. Refer to drawings for scheduled approved assemblies.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8”.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with a corrosion resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

E. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached.


1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Roof Sheathing:

a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might

retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.

D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels.


PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1


SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes plastic sheet paneling and trim accessories.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling.

B. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for additional sealant requirements.

C. Section 102600 "Wall Protection" for stainless steel corner guards installed over plastic paneling.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact.


a. Crane Composites, Inc. b. Glasteel. c. Marlite. d. Newcourt, Inc. e. Nudo Products, Inc. f. Parkland Plastics, Inc.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 4. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 5. Color: White.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.

1. Color: Match panels.

B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate.

D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing or acid-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond.

B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide.

1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned.

1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners.

D. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails. Do not fasten through panels.

E. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

F. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.


G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.


COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1


SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes polyurethane waterproofing (including accessory and miscellaneous materials), drainage panels, and sub-grade insulation.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 072726 “Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers” for material source limitations.

B. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation” for above-grade insulation.

C. Section 334600 “Subdrainage” for sub-grade perforated-wall pipes, fittings and associated filter fabric.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.



A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point.

2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years.

1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, and insulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials,molded-sheet drainage panels and fluid applied membrane air barrier from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING

A. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. c. Tremco Incorporated.


2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated acrylic latex, polyurethane, or epoxy.

C. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil-minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene.

1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

D. Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric, manufacturer's standard weight.

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

F. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.

1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.

2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS <DP-01>

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 18 gpm per ft..


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 INSULATION

A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, square edged.


a. DiversiFoam Products.


b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning.

2. Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids.

D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS

A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.


3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip

at least 6 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate.

1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 60 mils.

2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq.

ft..

3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over molded drainage panel. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.



A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections:

1. Testing agency shall verify thickness of waterproofing during application for each 600 sq. ft. of installed waterproofing or part thereof.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components and to furnish daily reports to Architect.

C. If test results or inspections show waterproofing does not comply with requirements, remove and replace or repair the waterproofing as recommended in writing by manufacturer, and make further repairs after retesting and inspecting until waterproofing installation passes.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Protect installed board insulation and insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.


THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1


SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section Includes: a. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board <IN-02>. b. Mineral-wool blanket <IN-03>. c. Mineral board insulation <IN-04> d. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation <IN-05>.



1.3 RELATED WORK:

1. Section 071416 "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for below grade insulation <IN-01>.

2. Section 072119 "Foamed-in-Place Insulation" for spray-applied polyurethane foam insulation <IN-05>.

3. Section 072120 “Spray-Applied Cellulosic Acoustical Insulation” for spray-applied cellulosic acoustical insulation <IN-06>

4. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction <IN-07>.

5. Section 092216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” for adhesive backed, closed-cell vinyl foam isolation strips at exterior walls.

6. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation <IN-08>.

B. DEFINITIONS

1. Approved NFPA 285 Assembly: The collection of exterior enclosure components and accessory materials identified, installed and tested together as an entire exterior wall assembly per NFPA 285. An approved assembly must meet or exceed the testing requirements of NFPA 285





A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced <IN-02>: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2.


a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; EnergyShield PRO. b. Dow Chemical Company (The); THERMAX Insulation. c. Hunter Panels; Xci Class A.

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. Refer to drawings for scheduled approved assemblies.

2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced <IN-03>: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC). b. Roxul Inc. c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.


2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD

A. Mineral-Wool Board, Types IA and IB, Faced <IN-04>: ASTM C 612, Types IA and IB; faced on one side with foil-scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION

A. Butt panels together for tight fit.

B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.


3.4 INSTALLATION OF RAIN SCREEN INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION

A. Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Use fans to keep air moving across the material and force moisture laden air outside. The material must be ventilated continuously until dry.

C. Remove and dispose of over-spray.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION

A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated on Drawings between insulation and glass.

2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

B. It is the General Prime’s responsibility to ensure proper ventilation after the application is complete.


FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 1


SECTION 072119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section Includes: a. Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam insulation <IN-02>, and associated

miscellaneous materials.



1.3 RELATED WORK:

A. Section 071416 "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for below grade insulation<IN-01>.

B. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation" for foam-plastic board insulation.

C. Section 072120 “Spray-Applied Cellulosic Acoustical Insulation” for spray-applied cellulosic acoustical insulation <IN-06>

D. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction <IN-07>.

E. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation <IN-08>.







A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Spray polyurethane foam insulation shall be separated from the interior of the building by an approved thermal barrier of ½-inch minimum thickness gypsum wall board that will limit the average temperature rise of the unexposed surface to not more than 250F after 15 minutes of fire exposure. Where insulation is not separated from the interior, provide an intumescent or other coating with FM 4880, UL 1040 or UL1715 written approval indicating manufacturer of spray polyurethane cellular plastic foam insulation and coating as a part of the test assembly.

1. Refer to Part 3 – Execution; Section 3.4 for schedule of tested assemblies.

2.2 CLOSED-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM

A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum density of 2.0 lb/cu. ft. and minimum aged R-value at 1-inch thickness of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.


a. BASF Corporation; Comfort Foam 178 Spray Applied Polyurethane Foam Insulation.

b. Dow Chemical Company (The); STYROFOAM Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation.

c. Preferred Solutions, Inc.; Staycell 245-2.0 Spray Applied Polyurethane Foam Insulation.

d. Preferred Solutions, Inc.; Staycell ONE STEP 255 Spray Foam Insulation.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


2.3 THERMAL BARRIER

A. Thermal Barrier: Intumescent or other coating with FM 4880, UL 1040 or UL1715 written approval indicating manufacturer of spray polyurethane cellular plastic foam insulation and coating as a part of the test assembly.



a. International Cellulose Corporation; Ure-K Thermal Barrier System to 1¼” thickness.

b. Specialty Products, Inc; FlameSeal-TB coating applied at 18 mils dry thickness. c. Preferred Solutions, Inc.; Stayflex 2505 Thermal Barrier Coating.


A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of insulation to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.

C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer. Do not spray into rising foam.

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.


3.4 SCHEDULE – TESTED ASSEMBLIES

ASSEMBLY 1

Dow Chemical Company (The) STYROFOAM Spray Polyurethane

International Cellulose Corporation Ure-K Thermal Barrier System

ASSEMBLY 2

BASF Corporation Comfort Foam 178

Specialty Products, Inc FlameSeal-TB coating

ASSEMBLY 3

Preferred Solutions, Inc. Staycell 245-2.0

Preferred Solutions, Inc. Stayflex 2505 Thermal Barrier Coating

ASSEMBLY 4

Preferred Solutions, Inc. Staycell ONE STEP 255

No Thermal Barrier Required


SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 072120 - 1


SECTION 072120 – SPRAY APPLIED CELLULOSIC ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes spray-applied cellulosic acoustical insulation, associated miscellaneous materials and coordination.



1.3 RELATED WORK:

1. Section 072119 “Foamed-In-Place Insulation” for closed-cell spray polyurethane foam insulation.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for mineral wool acoustic insulation in walls.





1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in original, unopened containers bearing name of manufacturer, product identification and reference to U.L. testing.

B. Store materials dry, off ground, and under cover.


C. Protect liquid adhesive from freezing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Bond Strength: Greater than 100psf when tested according to ASTM E736.

B. Flame/Smoke Propagation: Class 1 Class A when tested according to ASTM E84 / UL723.

C. Non-corrosive when tested according to ASTM C739.

D. Bond Deflection: No spalling or delamination with a 6” deflection in 10’ span when tested according to ASTM E759.

E. NRC: Minimum 70 at thickness indicated on drawings.

2.2 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC ACOUSTIC INSULATION

A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation <IN-05>: ASTM C 1149, Type I (materials applied with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.


a. International Cellulose Corp.; K-13 Spray-On Systems. b. Isolatek International.; CAFCO Sound Shield 40. c. Monoglass Inc.; Sonoglass Spray-on Sound Absorption

2. Color: Custom color to match Architect’s paint sample 3. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.


A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of insulation to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Verify surfaces to receive spray insulation to determine if priming/sealing is required to insure bonding and/or to prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory coverings for materials/surfaces that are not to receive insulation to protect from over-spray.

D. General Prime Contractor is responsible to coordinate installation of the spray-applied cellulosic acoustic insulation with work of all other prime contractors.

1. Clips, hangers, supports, sleeve and other attachments to spray bases are to be placed by other trades, prior to the application of sprayed insulation.

2. Ducts, piping, conduit or other suspended equipment will not be positioned until after the application of sprayed insulation.

3. Roof penetrations to be installed prior to application.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.

C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer.

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Use fans to keep air moving across the material and force moisture laden air outside. The material must be ventilated continuously until dry.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and dispose of over-spray.

B. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.

C. It is the General Prime Contractor’s responsibility to ensure proper ventilation after the application is complete until the building addition’s mechanical systems are fully operational.


VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1


SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes interior polyethylene vapor retarders.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders.

B. Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier" for vapor impermeable fluid-applied membrane air barrier in exterior wall system.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6-mil thick sheet, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm.

VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 2

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

B. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings.

B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction.


FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1


SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor retarding membrane air barriers including accessory materials.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments and for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

B. Section 071416 “Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing” for material source limitations.

C. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

D. Section 074213.23 “Metal Composite Material Wall Panels” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.


D. Approved NFPA 285 Assembly: The collection of exterior enclosure components and accessory materials identified, installed and tested together as an entire exterior wall assembly per NFPA 285. An approved assembly must meet or exceed the testing requirements of NFPA 285.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.



1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by the Installer, who work on Project.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly 150 sq. ft., incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly. a. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and

foundation wall intersection. b. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct

mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials, air-barrier accessories, and cold-applied waterproofing from single source from single manufacturer.


A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.

2.3 VAPOR-RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER <AVM-01>

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer membrane.

1. Synthetic Polymer Membrane:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) BASF Corporation; Construction Systems


2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. 3) Tremco Incorporated.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.005 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Vapor Permeance: Maximum1 perm; ASTM E 96/E 96M.

c. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. Refer to drawings for scheduled approved assemblies.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.

B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil-thick, cross-laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing.

D. Modified Bituminous Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

F. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

G. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

H. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

I. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

J. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

K. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


L. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Concrete: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.


1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.


H. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

I. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day.

Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 3. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to

achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

1. Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil dry film thickness, applied in one or more equal coats.

C. Apply strip and transition strip according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative: Engage manufacturer’s representative to complete periodic inspections and generate written reports verifying manufacturer’s written installation requirements. Particular attention shall be paid toward openings, penetrations and tie-ins to other systems.

B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:

1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes.

2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided. 3. Concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar

droppings.


4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained.

5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have

been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with

requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

13. All penetrations have been sealed.

C. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass inspections.

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 180 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.


METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - 1


SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes metal composite material wall panels systems including accessories and miscellaneous materials.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061600 “Sheathing” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

B. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

C. Section 072726 “Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers” for NFPA 285 wall assembly testing requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Approved NFPA 285 Assembly: The collection of exterior enclosure components and accessory materials identified, installed and tested together as an entire exterior wall assembly per NFPA 285. An approved assembly must meet or exceed the testing requirements of NFPA 285.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Composite Material Panels: 3 inches long by 3 inches wide.




A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project.

1. Able to provide a list of 5 other projects of similar size, including approximate date of installation and the name of the Architect for each..


A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.



A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward.


2. Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/175 of the span at the perimeter and 1/60 of the span anywhere in the panel of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly components, panel stiffeners, and accessories required for weathertight system.


a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). b. ALUCOBOND; 3A Composites USA, Inc. c. Mitsubishi Plastics Composites America.

B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels <MCM-01>: Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings.

1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch. 2. Core: Fire retardant. 3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly. Refer to drawings for scheduled approved assemblies. 4. Exterior Finish:

a. Color: As scheduled below.

1) ALUCOBOND; 3A Composites USA, Inc: Patriot Red 2) Mitsubishi Plastics Composites America: OER Red 3) Alcoa Architectural Products (USA): Brite Red


C. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels <MCM-02>: Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings.




1) ALUCOBOND; 3A Composites USA, Inc: Caramel Latte Cool 2) Mitsubishi Plastics Composites America: Cry Cream 3) Alcoa Architectural Products (USA): Pueblo Tan

D. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels <MCM-03>: Formed with 0.020-inch-thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings.




1) ALUCOBOND; 3A Composites USA, Inc: Driftwood Mica Cool 2) Mitsubishi Plastics Composites America: Metallic MBX Bronze 3) Alcoa Architectural Products (USA): Titanium

E. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.

1. Design, fabricate and erect a pressure equalized wall panel system to meet the following requirements: a. Rain penetration: prevent rain penetration through wall system. Design system

based on “Rain Screen Principle”. Incorporate means of draining to the exterior. b. Wind load: Design wall system to resist wind loads, positive and negative,

expected in this geographical region without causing rattling, vibration or excessive deflection of panels, overstressing of fasteners, clips and other detrimental effects on system.

c. Structural and thermal movement: Accommodate movement of supporting structural framing and movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction of system component parts without causing bowing, buckling, delamination, oil canning, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on fasteners or any other detrimental effects.

2. Provide proprietary aluminum extrusions to manufacturer’s standard profiles for a complete installation.

3. Fasteners: as recommended by panel manufacturer, concealed and non-corrosive.


4. Extrusions and extrusion clips for attaching panels to the sub-structure: Purpose made aluminum. Extrusions shall be full length around panel perimeter for panel reinforcement and alignment. Intermittent clips are unacceptable.

5. Additional Panel Reinforcement: Provide extruded aluminum corner reinforcement full length around panel perimeter at all routed and bent locations.

6. Weeps: Provide oblong weeps with baffles at the bottom of each panel a maximum of 24” o.c. with a minimum of two per panel. Wherever possible, baffles shall be similar color as panel finish.

7. Horizontal Exposed Joints: Where joints are to be on a top horizontal surface (roof surface), caulk joints with silicone sealant.

8. Ventilation of Concealed Unconditioned Space: Route aluminum faced composite joint filler panel to provide ventilation behind panel assembly. Fillers shall be routed to provide percentage of free area indicated on drawings. Provide baffles at all routed openings. Wherever possible, baffle color shall approximate panel finish.

9. Plastic shims, shall be used as thermal separator between extrusions and sub-girts.

10. Sub-girts: If required, to be manufactured from G-90 galvanized steel and shall be designed to accommodate expansion and contraction, dynamic movements and design load requirements.

F. Attachment Assembly: Rainscreen principle open joint pressure equalized rout and return system with recessed aluminum-faced composite joint filler panel.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.


E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to


exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Two-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Three-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations.


3.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels. 2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with

self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or

self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.

8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel-system joint seals.

E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified.

1. Rainscreen Systems: Do not apply sealants to joints unless otherwise indicated.

F. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.

1. Seal top horizontal joints (roof joints) between adjacent panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


G. Rainscreen-Principle Installation: Install using manufacturer's standard assembly with vertical channel that provides support and secondary drainage assembly, draining at base of wall. Notch vertical channel to receive support pins. Install vertical channels supported by channel brackets or adjuster angles and at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach metal composite material wall panels by inserting horizontal support pins into notches in vertical channels and into flanges of panels. Leave horizontal and vertical joints with open reveal.

1. Install wall panels to allow individual panels to be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels.

2. Only apply sealants to top horizontal joints (roof joints).

H. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

I. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished


surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.23

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1


SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system, vapor retarder and roof insulation.



1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counterflashings. 4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 5. Section 221400 "Facility Storm Drainage" for roof drains.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.


2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's total system warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.



A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Total Roofing System Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Total Roofing System Warranty includes membrane, flashings, adhesives and sealants, insulation, substrate boards, air and vapor barrier / temporary roof, cover boards, fasteners, fastener plates, fastening bars, metal work, insulation adhesives, walkway products and other components of roofing system.


B. Installer’s Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as membrane, flashings, adhesives and sealants, insulation, substrate boards, air and vapor barrier / temporary roof, cover boards, fasteners, fastener plates, fastening bars, metal work, insulation adhesives and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Response Time: Contractor shall be on-site within twenty-four (24) hours to make repairs to reported leaks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Sure-Weld TPO Membrane. 2. Firestone Building Products; UltraPly TPO Membrane. 3. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company; JM TPO. 4. Versico Incorporated; Versiweld TPO System.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including membrane, flashings, adhesives and sealants, insulation, substrate boards, air and vapor barrier / temporary roof, cover boards, fasteners, fastener plates, fastening bars, metal work, insulation adhesives and walkway products for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.



A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures:

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: As indicated in structural drawings. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: As indicated in structural drawings. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: As indicated in structural drawings.

D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 76 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class B; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.3 TPO ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 2. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.


B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck.

2.6 VAPOR / AIR RETARDER

A. Temporary roof, air and vapor membrane, with maximum permeance rating of 0.02 perm.

1. Products: a. Firestone; V-Force b. Versico; Vap Air Seal 725R c. Carlisle; Vap Air Seal 725R

2.7 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.

1. Max Size: 4’x4’

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.


C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.

C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.

2.9 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.


B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.

D. Adjacent roof is under warranty. Roof is to be protected and any modifications shall be made by a roofing contractor approved under the existing warranty. If existing roof is to have construction traffic, then contractor needs to submit in writing how roof is being protected and approved by the existing roofing manufacturer.

3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Roof / Vapor Barrier: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:


1. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread low rise foam insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and continuously roll maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to roof deck continuously rolling. 1. Adhere cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.6 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

G. Spread water cut off mastic over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

H. No wrinkles will be allowed. If wrinkled full TPO sheet shall be replaced.

3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.


D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:

1. Owner: Illinois State University. 2. Address: Corner of Fell and North Street. 3. Building Name/Type: Watterson Dining Expansion Addition / Central Food Production

Facility. 4. Address: Corner of Fell and North Street.. 5. Area of Work: Total roof system from structural roof deck to roof membrane above.


6. Acceptance Date: _________________. 7. Warranty Period: 2 Years from Substantial Completion. 8. Expiration Date: __________________.

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by:

a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 110 mph. c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive

deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,

equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; and f. activity on roofing by others, including maintenance personnel, other persons, and

animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.


7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of ___________________, ________________.

1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________. 2. Name: ______________________________________. 3. Title: _______________________________________.


FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING, CONCRETE DECK 07 56 00.11 - 1


SECTION 07 56 00.11 – FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING, CONCRETE DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section. 1. Section includes

a. Roof coating preparation including preparation of concrete deck and substrate to receive fluid-applied flashing.

b. Application of fluid-applied roof membrane and flashings to new concrete deck.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

B. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings.

C. Section 099600 “High-Performance Coatings” for high-build acrylic coating used as a topcoat.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.


A. General: Provide recoated roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when

tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.


1. Provide roofing materials compatible with high-build acrylic coating applied as a top-coat. Roofing manufacture shall coordinate surface preparation of roofing materials with high-build acrylic coating manufacturer so as to maintain the warranties of both materials.

C. Roofing System Design: Modify roofing system as required so that roofing system will perform identically to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7.

1. Corner, Perimeter, and Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressures: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

D. Flashings: Comply with requirements of Division 07 Sections “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”. Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following: 1. Roof system manufacturer’s construction details and recommendations. 2. NRCA Roofing Manual (Sixth Edition) for construction details and recommendations. 3. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Seventh Edition) for construction details.

E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class B; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.


A. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Provide manufacturer’s written certificate confirming that application of the specified high-build acrylic coating and associated preparation recommended by that manufacturer is compatible with the roofing system specified in this section and the full roofing system warranty will be maintained.


A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.

B. Warranties: Executed copies of approved warranty forms.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years’ experience installing products comparable to those specified, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and the following: 1. Qualified by the manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and furnish warranty of

type specified. 2. Licensed to perform asbestos abatement work in Project jurisdiction.


B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years experience in manufacture of specified products in successful use in similar applications.

C. Roofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer not engaged in the sale of products and experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article, to determine Installer’s compliance with the requirements of this Project, and approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector shall be one of the following: 1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer.

D. Roofing Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system. 1. Meet with roofing materials manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer including

project manager and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

4. Review existing conditions that may require notification of Owner before proceeding.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to deck or structural supporting members.

C. Protect materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting.


A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Store all materials prior to application at temperatures between 60 and 90 deg. F. 2. Apply coatings within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by

manufacturer. Do not apply materials when air temperature is below 50 or above 110 deg. F.

3. Do not apply roofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with coating preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing roofing system or building.


1.12 WARRANTY

A. Roof System Warranty, General: Warranties specified in this Section include the following components and systems specified in other sections supplied by the roofing system Manufacturer, and installed by the roofing system Installer: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim, including roof penetration flashings. 2. Manufactured copings, roof edge, counterflashings, and reglets.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty in which Manufacturer agrees to repair roofing installations that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Membrane failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of membranes, coatings, metals, metal finishes, and other associated

materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Limit of Warranty Coverage for Repair of Roofing: Not to exceed original purchase

price of manufacturer's coating materials, except that manufacturer may elect to apply the limit amount toward the following:

a. Purchase of a new replacement roof within the first 5 years following completion of coating work.

3. Qualified Installer Requirement: Installer must meet requirements of Quality Assurance Article.

4. Installation Inspection Requirement: By Roofing Inspector in accordance with requirements of Part 3 Field Quality Control Article.

5. Annual Manufacturer Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Requirement: By manufacturer's technical representative, to report maintenance responsibilities to Owner necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights. The cost of manufacturer's annual inspections and preventive maintenance is included in the Contract Sum. Inspection to occur in Year 2 following completion.

6. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of completion of roofing work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Tremco, Inc. 2. Ecology Roof Systems. 3. Pacific Polymers. 4. Sika Corporation.


A. General: Fluid-applied roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing membrane roofing system.


2.3 FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Polyurethane Elastomeric Fluid-Applied System: ASTM D 7311, elastomeric, two-coat single-component moisture triggered polyurethane fluid-applied roofing formulated for application to structural concrete deck, with the following minimum physical properties: 1. Aliphatic Urethane Base Coat:

a. Asbestos Content, EPA/600/R-93/116: None. b. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), ASTM D 3960: Not greater than 40 g/L. c. Percent solids (by weight), ASTM D 1644: Not less than 85 percent.

2. Aliphatic Urethane Top Coat: UV-stabilized, chemical-resistant top coat:

a. Asbestos Content, EPA/600/R-93/116: None. b. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), ASTM D 3960: Not greater than 45 g/L. c. Elongation at break, ASTM D 7311: Not less than 340 percent d. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 7311: Not less than 1,400 lbf/sq. in. e. Tear Resistance, ASTM D 7311: Not less than 150 lbf/in. f. Accelerated Weathering, 5000 hour, ASTM D 7311: Pass, no cracking or

checking. g. Percent solids (by weight), ASTM D 1353: Not less than 85 percent. h. Color: White.

B. Fiberglass Reinforcement: Medium to fine fiber, rapid wetting chopped strand glass mat for fluid-applied membrane and flashing.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with existing roofing system and fluid-applied roofing system.

B. Structural Concrete/Masonry Primer: Two-component, 100 percent solids, epoxy penetrating primer for concrete deck surfaces.

C. Metal Surface Primer: Single-component, water based primer to promote adhesion of base coat to metal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roofing substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting application and performance of fluid-applied roofing. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental

to performance. 2. Verify that substrates are sound, visibly dry and free of moisture. 3. Verify that substrates have adequately cured to enable proper bond with base coat. 4. Application of fluid-applied roofing indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Shut down air intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work in coordination with the Owner. Cover air intake louvers before proceeding with coating work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in ductwork. 1. Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping affected by the Work have been shut off

before commencing Work. 2. Prevent dust, vapors, gases, and odors from entering occupied building during roof

installation. When shutting down or blocking air intakes, provide makeup air or additional intake air from sources away from the work area.

3.3 CONCRETE DECK PREPARATION

A. Preparation, General: Repair, clean, and prepare concrete to sound condition free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds and other contaminants.

B. Concrete Repair: Remove defective concrete and repair honeycombs, cavities, joint cracks, voids and other defects by routing to sound material and patching. Patch all unsound or defective concrete with repair mortar recommended for application and approved by Architect.

C. Detergent Cleaning: Remove oil, grease smear and asphalt residue with trisodium phosphate . For oil contaminated surfaces, use steam cleaning in conjunction with a strong emulsifying detergent. Rinse thoroughly with potable water.

D. Mechanical Abrasion: Smooth precast and formed concrete surfaces must be cleaned, roughened and made absorptive by mechanical abrasion. Remove surface laitance and abrade surface to CSP 3-6 in accordance with ICRI Guideline 310.

E. Acid Etching: Where mechanical abrasion cannot be utilized, acid etch concrete deck with 15 percent hydrochloric acid solution. Following etching, flush surface with water to neutralize the surface; remove salts and residue from the reaction.

F. Testing: Following surface preparation, perform testing to verify concrete substrate is adequate prepared to receive fluid-applied roofing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. PH Test: Verify pH level is within range acceptable to roofing manufacturer when tested

per ASTM D 4262. 2. Pull Test: Verify that the cleaned surface pulls concrete when tested per ASTM D 4541. 3. Moisture Test: Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture when

tested by plastic sheet method per ASTM D 4263.

3.4 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Primer Coat: Apply substrate primer coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Back roll to achieve minimum wet mil coating thickness of 48 mils unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer; verify thickness of base coat as work progresses. 1. Apply using short nap roller, squeegee, brush or airless spray. Ensure primer does not

puddle and substrate has complete coverage. 2. Base coat may be applied once primer is tack free.


B. Base Coat: Apply base coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Back roll to achieve minimum wet mil coating thickness of 48 mils unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer; verify thickness of base coat as work progresses. 1. Apply base coat on prepared and primed surfaces and spread coating evenly. 2. Embed fiberglass reinforcement into wet base coat. Lap adjacent flashing pieces of

fiberglass minimum 3 inches along edges and 6 inches at end laps. 3. Roll surface of fiberglass reinforcing to completely embed and saturate fabric. Leave

finished base coat with fabric free of pin holes, voids, or openings. 4. Allow base coat to cure prior to application of top coat. 5. Following curing of base coat and prior to application of top coat, sand raised or exposed

edges of fiberglass reinforcement.

C. Top Coat: Apply top coat uniformly in a complete installation to field of roof and flashings. 1. Prime base coat prior to application of top coat if top coat is not applied within 72 hours

of the base coat application, using manufacturer's recommended primer. 2. Apply top coat to flashings extending coating up vertical surfaces and out onto horizontal

surfaces 4 inches. Install top coat over field base coat and spread coating evenly. 3. Back roll to achieve wet mil thickness of 32 mils unless otherwise recommended by

manufacturer. 4. Avoid foot traffic on new fluid-applied membrane for a minimum of 24 hours.

D. Fluid-Applied Flashing Application: Complete base coat and fiberglass reinforcement at parapets, curbs, penetrations, and drains prior to application of field of fluid-applied membrane. 1. Extend coating minimum of 8 inches up vertical surfaces and 4 inches onto horizontal

surfaces.


A. Roof Inspection: Contractor shall engage roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation, and submit report to the Architect. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of dates and times of inspections. Inspect work as follows: 1. Upon completion of preparation of first component of work, prior to application of re-

coating materials. 2. Following application of re-coating to flashings and application of base coat to field of

roof. 3. Upon completion of re-coating but prior to re-installation of other roofing components.

B. Repair fluid-applied membrane where test inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Arrange for additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, to verify compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove coatings that do not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and reapply coatings.


C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 07 56 00.11

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1


SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrication, formed wall sheet metal fabrications, formed equipment support flashing, and formed overhead-piping safety pans.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

B. Section 074213.23 "Metal Composite Material Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels.

C. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.

D. Section 079500 "Expansion Control" for manufactured sheet metal expansion-joint covers.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.




1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 9. Include details of special conditions. 10. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:


a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: Match adjacent metal composite paneling. 3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or

lower.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.


C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.


F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.6 MANUFACTURED LOW ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS


1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated 2. Firestone Building Products 3. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company 4. Versico Incorporated

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including membrane, flashings, adhesives and sealants, insulation, substrate boards, air and vapor barrier / temporary roof, cover boards, fasteners, fastener plates, fastening bars, metal work, insulation adhesives and walkway products for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

C. Copings: Units in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Manufacture interior and exterior corners.

1. Coping Profile: As indicated on Drawings. Dimensions may be adjusted to meet manufacturer’s standard dimensions.

2. Joint Style: As required to obtain full roof system warranty. 3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.050” or as required to obtain full roof system warranty.

D. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Material: Aluminum, 0.050 inch thick. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

3. Accessories:

a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.


4. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including membrane, flashings, adhesives and sealants, insulation, substrate boards, air and vapor barrier / temporary roof, cover boards, fasteners, fastener plates, fastening bars, metal work, insulation adhesives and walkway products for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Where roof manufacturer’s metal work is not available, provide shop fabrications as specified in this paragraph. Follow roof manufacturer’s fabrication and installation requirements.

C. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

D. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:


E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


G. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4-1/2 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:



B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.


B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers.


2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4-1/2 inches beyond wall openings.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."



A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1


SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Base Bid: The Heating Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of heating penetrations, pipe supports, and equipment curbs / supports as specified in this section.

B. Base Bid: The Ventilation Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of ventilation penetrations, pipe supports, and equipment curbs / supports as specified in this section.

C. Base Bid: The Electrical Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of electrical penetrations, pipe supports, and equipment curbs / supports as specified in this section.

D. Base Bid: The Plumbing Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of plumbing penetrations, pipe supports, and equipment curbs / supports as specified in this section.

E. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of the roof membrane and counterflashing as specified in this section.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs for access to roof hatches.

B. Division 07 low-slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories.

C. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.

D. Division 23 Section "HVAC Fans" for power roof-mounted ventilators.



A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.

D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit. 4. Required clearances.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.


c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.

D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated.

C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated.

D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, fire-treated and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


F. Underlayment:

1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 2. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

G. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

H. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

I. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

J. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.3 ROOF CURBS

A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced double-walled roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


a. AES Industries, Inc. b. Curbs Plus, Inc. c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. LM Curbs. f. Metallic Products Corp. g. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. h. Pate Company (The). i. Roof Products, Inc. j. Safe Air of Illinois. k. Thybar Corporation. l. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Loads: As indicated in drawings.

D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, thickness determined by equipment weight.


1. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 2. Color: Bone White – Color to match roof hatch

E. Construction:

1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick glass-fiber board insulation. 2. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 3. Factory-installed fire-treated wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb

perimeter. 4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to

conform to roof profile. 5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 18 inches unless otherwise indicated. 6. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the

deck-mounting flange. 7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height

tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


a. AES Industries, Inc. b. Curbs Plus, Inc. c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. LM Curbs. f. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. g. Pate Company (The). h. Roof Products, Inc. i. Thybar Corporation. j. Vent Products Co., Inc.

B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

C. Loads: As indicated in drawings.

D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, thickness determined by equipment weight.

1. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 2. Color: Bone White – Color to match roof hatch

E. Construction:

1. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick polyisocyanurate board insulation compatible with roof system.


2. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.

3. Factory-installed continuous fire-treated wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports.

4. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support.

5. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

6. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 18 inches unless otherwise indicated. 7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to

accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.

PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Supports: Adjustable-height, extruded-aluminum tube, filled with urethane insulation; 2 inches in diameter; with aluminum baseplate, EPDM base seal, manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.

1. Pipe Support Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Roller Assembly: With stainless-steel roller, sized for supported pipes. 3. Pipe Support Flashing: Manufacturer's standard insulated sleeve flashing with integral

base flange; aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Duct Supports: Extruded-aluminum, urethane-insulated supports, 2 inches in diameter; with manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck.

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.


C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or

loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.

D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.

E. Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide equally distributed support along length of supported item.

F. Seal joints with elastomeric as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1


SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section Includes: a. Sprayed fire-resistive, and associated auxiliary materials.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 078123 "Intumescent Fireproofing" for mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive materials.



1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans or schedules, or both, indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.


2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly.

4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.


2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material <FP-01>: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application.


a. Carboline Company; a subsidiary of RPM International; AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 7GP.

b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Grace Construction Products; Monokote Z-106.

c. Isolatek International; Cafco Blaze-Shield II.

2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bond Strength: Minimum 200-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736.

4. Density: Not less than density specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605.

5. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch.

6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


8. Compressive Strength: Minimum 1,200 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM E 761. 9. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 10. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 11. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to

ASTM E 760. 12. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.00 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to

ASTM E 859. 13. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial

formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 14. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish and color.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements:


1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing.

E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design.

1. Verify that substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

2. Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Verify that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of rooftop HVAC equipment, and other related work are complete before beginning fireproofing work.

D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.


E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks:

1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, is completed.

2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing is completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for conditions of exposure and intended use. For


auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.

J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied.

K. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected.


A. Special Inspections: General Prime Contractor shall engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 1705.13, "Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials."

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.



3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.


INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 1


SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 078100 "Applied Fireproofing" for sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).



1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, thicknesses, and other performance requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans or schedules, or both, indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of

each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.




B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 50 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS

A. Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistive Coating <FP-02>: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation or factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design.



a. Carboline Company; a subsidiary of RPM International; AD Firefilm III. b. Hilti, Inc.; CFP-S WB Fire Protection Steel Spray. c. Isolatek International; CAFCO SprayFilm WB 5.

2. Application: Designated for "interior general purpose" use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design.

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


5. Hardness: Not less than 61, Type D durometer, according to ASTM D 2240. 6. Impact: Not less than 152 inch-lbs, according to ASTM D 2794. 7. Abrasion: Not more than 103 mg loss @ 1,000 cycles, according to ASTM D4060. 8. Bond Strength: Not less than 125 psi, according to ASTM D4541. 9. Compressive Strength: Not less than 757 psi, according to ASTM E761. 10. Density: Not less than 89 pcf 11. Finish: Smooth.

a. Color: White.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

D. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

E. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design.

1. Verify that substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

2. Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Verify that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.


B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

K. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 1705.14, "Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings.".

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed


applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.


3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.


PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1


SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 078446 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 8. Specified Technologies Inc. 9. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 10. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 11. USG Corporation.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls, and fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.


1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.


D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners


or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items FS-#1:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Construction Penetrated: F, W, C b. Type of Construction : A, J, L c. System Identification: 0001-0999.

2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty.


d. Mortar.

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing FS-#2:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Construction Penetrated: F, W, C b. Type of Construction : A, J, L c. System Identification: 1001-1999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing FS-#3:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems a. Construction Penetrated: F, W, C b. Type of Construction: A, J, L c. System Identification: 2001-2999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device.

E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables FS-#4:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Construction Penetrated: F, W, C b. Type of Construction: A, J, L c. System Identification: 3001-3999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Silicone foam. e. Pillows/bags.

F. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays FS-#5:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Construction Penetrated: F, W, C b. Type of Construction: A, J, L. c. System Identification: 4001-4999.



a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Pillows/bags. e. Mortar.

G. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes FS-#6:



a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Intumescent wrap strips.

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants FS-#7:



a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Mortar.

I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants FS-#8:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Construction Penetrated: F, W, C b. Type of Construction: A, J, L c. System Identification: 7001-7999.

2. Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar.

J. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants FS-#9:



a. Latex sealant.


b. Mortar. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet.


FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1


SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


1. Head of wall joints 2. Wall to wall joints 3. Perimeter fire-resistive joint systems consisting of floor to wall joints between perimeter

edge of fire-resistance rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls.



B. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.



B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.


C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency.

b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.


B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Testing Agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-resistive joint systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Nelson Firestop Products. 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division

2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.

C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.

D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.


E. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

G. Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

H. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods


used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.


C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

A. Head-of-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Movement: HW-D-0000-0999 (less than or equal to 2”). b. Movement: HW-D-1000-1999 (greater than 2” and less than or equal to 6”)

2. Assembly Rating: As indicated on drawings. 3. Joint Width: As indicated on drawings. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class I - 50 percent compression or extension.

B. Wall-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: a. Movement: WW-D-0000-0999 (less than or equal to 2”) b. Movement: WW-D-1000-1999 (greater than 2” and less than or equal to 6”).

2. Assembly Rating: As indicated on drawings. 3. Joint Width: As indicated on drawings. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class I- 50 percent compression or extension.

C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems:

1. Available UL-Classified Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: a. Movement CW-D-000-0999 (less than or equal to 2”) b. Movement CW-D-1000-1999 (greater than 2” and less than or equal to 6”)

2. Integrity Rating: As indicated. 3. Insulation Rating: As indicated. 4. Linear Opening Width: As indicated. 5. Movement Capabilities: Class I – 50 percent compression or extension..

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1


SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes urethane joints sealants, mildew-resistant, and latex sealants.



1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.


2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

C. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.



B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with


requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.


2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; MasterSeal NP 1 (Pre-2014: Sonolastic NP1).

b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants; Sikaflex-15 LM or 2c NS Joint Sealant c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic 100.

B. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; MasterSeal SL 2 (Pre-2014: Sonolastic SL2).

b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants; Sikaflex 2c SL. c. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901.

2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Silicone Sealant. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SCS1700

Sanitary. c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation; Bondaflex Sil

100 WF. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; Sonolac. b. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation; Bondaflex 600.


c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), or as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:


1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.


D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.


4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces <JS-01>.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between metal panels. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, curtain wall

and louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

1. Joint Sealant: Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces <JS-02>.


1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces <JS-03>.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, concrete, walls, and partitions. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement <JS-04>.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, borrowed lites and elevator entrances not exposed to food preparation, storage and staging areas.

b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces <JS-05>.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, borrowed lites and elevator entrances exposed to food preparation, storage and staging areas.

b. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. c. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 079219 - 1


SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes acoustical sealants.



1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for urethane, latex, and mildew resistant joint sealants for nonacoustical applications.


A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 826 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. d. United States Gypsum Company; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

EXPANSION CONTROL 079500 - 1


SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED


1. Section includes interior and exterior expansion control systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for liquid-applied joint sealants in fire-resistive building joints.

C. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants and for elastomeric sealants without metal frames.


A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion control system. Where expansion control systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of expansion control system indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material.

C. Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system. 2. Expansion control system location cross-referenced to Drawings. 3. Nominal joint width. 4. Movement capability.


5. Classification as thermal or seismic. 6. Materials, colors, and finishes. 7. Product options. 8. Fire-resistance ratings.


A. Product Test Reports: For each fire barrier provided as part of an expansion control system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials.

2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control systems.

B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall and soffit expansion control systems with roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint assemblies are specified elsewhere.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide expansion control systems with fire barriers identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling systems shall be subjected to hose stream testing.

B. Seismic Performance: Expansion control systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Component Importance Factor is [1.5] [1.0].


2.3 INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS


1. Architectural Art Manufacturing Inc.; a division of Pittcon Architectural Metals, LLC. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. InPro Corporation (IPC). 5. Michael Rizza Company. 6. MM Systems Corporation. 7. Nystrom, Inc. 8. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Wall-to-Wall <EJ-01>:

1. Design Criteria:

a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent. c. Type of Movement: Thermal, Seismic.

2. Type: Glide plate.

a. Metal: Aluminum.

1) Finish: Clear anodic, Class I.

b. Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard.

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Wall Corner <EJ-02>:

1. Design Criteria:



a. Metal: Aluminum.





E. Wall-to-Ceiling <EJ-03>:

1. Design Criteria:



a. Metal: Aluminum.




F. Ceiling-to-Ceiling <EJ-04>:

1. Design Criteria:



a. Metal: Aluminum.




2.4 EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS


1. Construction Specialties, Inc. 2. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. 3. Tremco Incorporated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Wall-to-Wall <EJ-05>:

1. Design Criteria:


a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent. c. Type of Movement: Thermal and Seismic.

2. Type: Preformed cellular foam.

a. Foam Material: Microsphere-modified-acrylic-impregnated foam sealant, factory pre-coated with high-grade silicone.


2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate.

1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.

B. Elastomeric Seals: ASTM E 1783; preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames.

C. Compression Seals: ASTM E 1612; preformed elastomeric extrusions having an internal baffle system and designed to function under compression.

D. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces where expansion control systems will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion control systems.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems.

1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.

2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance.

3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames.

4. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkage-resistant grout.

5. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.

a. Shimming is not permitted.

6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.

C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.

1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat-weld

field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or

pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.


D. Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as recommended by manufacturer to both sides before installing compression seals.

E. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices.

F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion control system materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements.

1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over expansion control systems. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1


SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes hollow-metal work.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 081119 "Stainless-Steel Doors and Frames" for hollow-metal doors and frames manufactured from stainless steel.

B. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

C. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glazing in hollow metal doors and frames

D. Section 088813 “Fire-Resistant Glazing” for glazing in fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.




1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. LaForce, Inc. 3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel-stiffener core with sound deadening

insulation between stiffeners.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent

door frame. c. Construction: Face welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.


2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with

minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene, polyurethane, or polyisocyanurate at

manufacturer's discretion.

1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating.

b. Construction: Face welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 BORROWED LITES

A. Hollow-metal frames of metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.

B. Construction: Face welded.

2.6 HOLLOW-METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow-metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as adjacent door assemblies.

2.7 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:


1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing

not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.8 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."


J. Fire Rated Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088813 “Fire-Resistant Glazing”

K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at

manufacturer's discretion. 4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide flush

closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets. 5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets. 6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 7. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:


a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

7. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 90-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.


3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.


1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.


STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081119 - 1


SECTION 081119 - STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Alternate Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section.

1. Section Includes Stainless-steel, hollow-metal doors and panels.



1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for stainless-steel doors.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for stainless-steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



B. Shop Drawings: For stainless-steel hollow-metal work.

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.


C. Samples:

1. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches.

2. Doors: Include section of vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; glazing; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement.

3. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.

D. Product Schedule: For stainless-steel, hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For assemblies required to be fire rated performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Shipping Spreaders: Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded or mechanically attached to jambs and mullions.

C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.

1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES


1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Stainless Doors, Inc. 3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.



A. Performance: Level B, SDI A250.4.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

C. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: At corridors, smoke barriers, and smoke partitions, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.

2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL DOORS

A. Stainless-Steel Doors: Not less than 1-3/4 inches thick, of seamless, hollow-metal construction. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on faces.

1. Face Sheets: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. 2. Core Construction:

a. Laminated Core: Honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper with maximum 1-inch cells or foam-plastic insulation fastened to face sheets with waterproof adhesive.

1) Foam-Plastic Insulated Doors: Thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

a) Locations: Interior doors where indicated. b. Fire-Rated Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise

ratings indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius. 5. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch-thick stainless steel. 6. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors: 0.038-inch-thick stainless steel. 7. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, 0.062-inch-thick stainless

steel.

a. Spot welded to both face sheets.


8. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 866 with reinforcing plates from stainless steel.

B. Materials:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B; with

minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. 3. Foam-Plastic Insulation: Manufacturer's standard urethane board insulation with

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within door.

C. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

1. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL FRAMES

A. Stainless-Steel Frames: Fabricate stainless-steel frames of construction indicated, with faces of corners mitered and contact edges closed tight.

1. Frame Construction: Machine mitered and full (continuously) welded.

a. Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820.

2. Door Frames for Openings 48 Inches Wide or Less: Fabricate from 0.078-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet.

3. Door Frames for Openings More Than 48 Inches Wide: Fabricate from 0.078-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet.

4. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet of same thickness as adjacent door frame.

5. Glazing Stops: Formed integral with stainless-steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites: 0.038-inch-thick stainless steel. 7. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 866 with reinforcing

plates from stainless steel. 8. Head Reinforcement: 0.109-inch-thick, stainless-steel channel or angle stiffener for

opening widths more than 48 inches. 9. Jamb Anchors:

a. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.062-inch-thick stainless steel with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch thick.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.052-inch-nominal thickness metallic-coated steel.


c. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter, metallic-coated steel bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

10. Floor Anchors: Not less than 0.078-inch-thick stainless steel, and as follows:

a. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. b. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

11. Plaster Guards: Not less than 0.019-inch-thick stainless steel.

B. Materials:

1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B; with

minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. 3. Frame Anchors: Stainless-steel sheet. Same type as door face. 4. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Stainless-steel components complying with

ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts.

C. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

1. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Stainless-Steel Door Fabrication: Stainless-steel doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal.

1. Seamless Edge Construction: Door face sheets joined at vertical edges by continuous weld extending full height of door; with edges ground and polished, providing smooth, flush surfaces with no visible seams.

2. Stops and Moldings: Factory cut openings in doors. Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

a. Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door. b. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing

and type of installation indicated.

3. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless-steel doors to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the door hardware schedule.


a. Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

4. Tolerances: Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 866.

B. Stainless-Steel Frame Fabrication: Fabricate stainless-steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same thickness metal as frames.

2. Mullions, Rails and Transom Bars: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding according to joint designs in NAAMM-HMMA 820.

a. Provide false head member to receive lower ceiling where frames extend to finish ceilings of different heights.

3. Provide countersunk, flat-, or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches wide, provide continuous head reinforcement for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

8. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

a. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or frame.

b. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings such that each lite is capable of being removed independently.


c. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation .

9. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless-steel frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the door hardware schedule.

a. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

10. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises and mounting holes in frames to be grouted.

11. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 866.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

C. Mineral Fiber Insulation: Insulation made of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stainless-steel doors and frames.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of stainless-steel door-frame connections before frame installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace stainless-steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb, and perpendicular to frame head.


2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install stainless-steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with NAAMM-HMMA 866 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Stainless-Steel Frames:

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,

field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of grout-filled frames.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

5. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust stainless-steel frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:


a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb, and perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Stainless-Steel Doors: Fit stainless steel doors accurately in frames with the following clearances:

1. Non-Fire-Rated Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Install glazing in sidelites, transoms, and borrowed lites to comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

1. Secure stops with countersunk, flat-, or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work including stainless-steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Clean grout and other bonding material off stainless-steel doors and frames immediately after installation.

C. Stainless-Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainless steel and polish to match undamaged finish.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1


SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.



B. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.


B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Chappell Door Co. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 6. Haley Brothers, Inc. 7. Ipik Door Company. 8. Lambton Doors. 9. Marlite. 10. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 11. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 12. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 13. Poncraft Door Company. 14. Vancouver Door Company. 15. VT Industries Inc.


2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to

have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: White Maple. 3. Cut: Plain sawn. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate

room or area of building. 8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge

Type A. 9. Core: Particleboard. 10. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 11. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.


3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use.

B. Metal Louvers:

1. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V. 2. Metal and Finish: Baked enamel or powder-coated finish.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 10,

UV curable, water-based. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish 5. Sheen: Satin.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1


SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors.

1.4 ALLOWANCES

A. Access doors and frames are part of an access door and frame allowance.



1. Include construction details, fire ratings, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified, complete assembly minimum 6 by 6 inches in size.

C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges <AD-01>:


a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. Cendrex Inc. d. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Company; a division of Acorn Engineering

Company. e. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. f. Karp Associates, Inc. g. Lane-Aire Manufacturing Corp. h. Larsens Manufacturing Company. i. Maxam Metal Products Limited. j. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp. k. MIFAB, Inc. l. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. m. Nystrom, Inc. n. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Door Size: 24” X 24” minimum. 5. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage, factory finished. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Mortise Cylinder Preparation, prepare door panel to accept cylinder

specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.


2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. Provide access sleeves for each latch operator and install in holes cut through finish.

E. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 3. Mortise Cylinder Preparation: Where indicated, prepare door panel to accept cylinder

specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.4 FINISHES


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

2. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.


OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1


SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes interior service doors.

2. Materials as specified.

B. Alternate Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section.

1. Provide stainless steel in lieu of coated galvanized steel.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for finish painting of factory-primed doors.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.


2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.

4. Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than three hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.


A. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.


2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY <OH-1, OH-2>

A. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.


a. C.H.I. Overhead Doors, Inc.; Model 6201 Service Door. b. Overhead Door Corporation; Model 610. c. Raynor; DuraCoil Standard. d. Wayne-Dalton Corp; 900 Series.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

C. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/2-inch center-to-center height.

E. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from aluminum extrusions and finished to match door.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Shape: Round. 2. Mounting: Face of wall.

H. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day. 2. Operator Location: Wall mounted. 3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8 feet or lower.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor and automatic electric

sensor edge on bottom bar.

a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black.

7. Control Station(s): Where shown on Drawings.

I. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.036 inch; and as required.

2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum steel thickness of 0.036 inch.

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.6 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch-thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

2.7 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.8 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.


2.9 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, seamless or welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.

C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Equip with auxiliary counterbalance spring and prevent tension release from main counterbalance spring when automatic closing device operates.

D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf force for door operation. Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

2.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door.


1. Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is required for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft, headroom is required.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: 115/230 V. c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained or constant pressure on close button.

2. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.


H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf.

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

K. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.


A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.


2.13 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.


B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.

C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.


ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES 084213 - 1


SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes exterior manual-swing entrance doors and sub-frame units.




A. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for sealant beds as required for installation.

B. Section 084413 “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls” for curtain wall systems hosting exterior manual-swing entrance doors and sub-frame units.

C. Section 087100 “Door Hardware” for cylinders.

D. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glazing within exterior manual-swing entrance doors and sub-frame units.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.


2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals.



B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

D. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Entrance Doors: a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft.

F. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.38 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.20 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 75 as determined according to NFRC 500.

4. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS



1. EFCO Corporation; Thermastile Aluminum Swing Entrance Door. 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company; AA425 Thermal Entrance. 3. Tubelite Inc.; ThermlBlock Thermal Entrances, Medium Stile. 4. YKK AP America Inc; 35XT MegaTherm Commercial Swing Doors.

2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: Sub-frame compatible with curtain wall system as required.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

E. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.


1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

3. Opening-Force Requirements:

a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbfto set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum required width.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and

requirements for description, quality, and function.

C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf.

D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.

1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.

2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 3. Quantities:

a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf.

E. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

F. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

G. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware.".

1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE" to be furnished by Owner.

H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.

I. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.

J. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.


K. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.

L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.

M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip.

N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.


B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Dark bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:


1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

3.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.


GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 084413 - 1


SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls with standard cover plates.

B. Alternate Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section.

1. Frame type <AF-03> extended cover plates where indicated in drawings.



1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Section 079200 “Sealants” for installation of joint sealants installed with aluminum curtain walls and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Section 084213 “Aluminum-Frame Entrances” for aluminum entrance doors within aluminum curtain walls.

3. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing units associated with aluminum curtain walls.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.


1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of glazed aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.



B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.7 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls and associated sun control devices.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.


b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1 No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior.

I. Interstory Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

1. Design Displacement: As indicated on Drawings, H/280 or H/400 whichever is more stringent.


2. Test Performance: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

J. Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

2. Vertical Interstory Movement: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.7 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

K. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.38 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.20 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 75 as determined according to NFRC 500.

L. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows:

1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 37.

M. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F.

b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. EFCO Corporation.; System 5600 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.; 1600 System 1 3. Tubelite Inc.; 400 Series 4. YKK AP America Inc.; YCW750 OG


B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain wall system, including framing, entrances, sun control and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing.

1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

E. Non-Standard Profiles: Provide as required at no additional cost to Owner. It is not the intent of this section to disallow minor differences in dimensions of 1” or less between manufacturers.

F. Framing Type <AF-01> 1. Locations: Area E, as indicated on Drawings. 2. Overall System Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Snap-on Cover Trim: ¾” (Standard) 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish

G. Framing Type <AF-02> 1. Locations: Areas C, F, G as indicated on Drawings.


2. Overall System Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Snap-on Cover Trim: ¾” (Standard) 4. Finish: Dark bronze anodic finish

H. Framing Type <AF-03> 1. Locations: Areas A, B, D as indicated on Drawings. 2. Overall System Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Snap-on Cover Trim: ¾” (Standard), 9” (Extended) 4. Finish: Provide separate finish inside / out as indicated below.

a. Body: Dark bronze anodic finish b. Standard Cover Plate: Dark bronze anodic finish c. Extended Cover Plate: High-performance organic finish to match adjacent metal

composite panels.

2.4 ENTRANCES

A. Entrances: Comply with Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.


2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:

1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

2. Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented to exterior.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Dark bronze.

C. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF or FEVE resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match adjacent metal composite panel color. Provide custom color if required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize

distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."


A. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.


b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.


07/01/16 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

ILLINOIS STATE UNIVERSITY CORDOGAN, CLARK & ASSOCIATES, INC. WATTERSON DINING EXPANSION PROJECT 960 RIDGEWAY AVENUE NORMAL, ILLINOIS AURORA, ILLINOIS CCA PROJECT NUMBER: 14362 630-896-4678 BID SET JULY 01, 2016 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. General Prime:

a. Mechanical door hardware for swinging doors. b. Power Supplies c. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in

this section for: 1. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 2. Toilet accessories

2. Electrical Prime:

a. Rough-in, electrical service connections, and low voltage cable.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Base Bid:

1. Section 08 11 33 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. Section 08 11 19 – Stainless-Steel Doors and Frames 3. Section 08 14 00 – Flush Wood Doors 4. Section 08 42 13 – Aluminum Framed Entrances 5. Division 26 – Electrical

B. Alternate:

1. Section 08 11 19 - Stainless Steel Doors and Frames

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The following references are used in this section.

1. NFPA 80 – Standards for Fire Doors and Windows 2. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures 3. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware, DHI, 1984 4. ANSI / BHMA A156.18, Materials and Finishes, 2006


1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that functions properly. Prior to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not operate properly, are improper for conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.

1.5 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work under this section includes furnishing and the installation of finish and security hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified door hardware components including finish and security hardware and auto operators for entrance doors. 1. Items include, but are not limited to:

a. Hinges/Continuous Hinges b. Flush Bolts c. Exit Devices d. Locksets and Cylinders e. Closers f. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates g. Stops, Wall Bumpers, Overhead Controls h. Thresholds, Gasketing and Door Bottoms i. Silencers j. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit 5 copies of hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of

Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking.

2. Hardware schedule must clearly indicate architect's hardware group and manufacturer of each item proposed.

3. The schedule must be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), who must affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the schedule. a. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding

conditions. Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions in hardware schedule.

b. Provide listing of manufacturer's template numbers for each item of hardware in hardware schedule.

c. Furnish other Contractors and Subcontractors concerned with copies of final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to hollow metal, wood door, and aluminum door fabricators in accordance with schedule they require for fabrication.

d. Samples: Lever design or finish sample: Provide 3 samples if requested by architect.

B. Installation Instructions:


1. Provide manufacturer's written installation and adjustment instructions for finish hardware. Send installation instructions to site with hardware.

C. Templates: 1. Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and

others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing.

D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Comply with Section 01700 including specific requirements indicated below.

a. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: 1. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair

and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. 2. Catalog pages for each product. 3. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each

manufacturer. 4. Parts list for each product. 5. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect "As installed". 6. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of

hardware, including changing of cylinders.


A. General Contractor’s Investigation: 1. Prior to Contract Execution, the General Contractor must have thoroughly investigated

the entities that will be performing work or supplying materials, products, equipment, or systems for this project, to ensure that they comply with all of the qualifications and requirements mentioned or implied in the Contract Documents.

2. If it is later determined that any of the previously mentioned entities do not comply with the qualifications and requirements specified in the Contract Documents, the General Contractor will be required to replace that entity with a qualified entity at no increase in Contract Sum or Contract Time/

B. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain each type of hardware (ie. latch and locksets, hinges, closers) from single

manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

C. Qualifications of the Hardware Supplier: 1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has

been furnishing hardware and installation in the Project’s vicinity for a period of not less than 4 years.

2. The supplier must be, or must employ, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about the Project’s hardware requirements, to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor.

3. An Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) must prepare all hardware and access control schedules. This Supplier must be responsible for proper coordination of all finish hardware items and access control items with related sections to insure compatibility of products.


a. Hardware supplier must be an authorized, direct factory distributor of all door hardware products specified herein to insure compliance and service of these products.

b. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

D. Qualifications of Installer: 1. The hardware installer must have documented experience in the installation of hardware

of similar quantities and types as required for this project. 2. The installer’s qualifications must be submitted to the architect, in writing, for approval

by the architect before any work must commence.

E. Fire-Rated Openings: 1. Furnish door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80

and requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Furnish only items, of door hardware, that are listed and are identical to products tested

by UL, ITS-WH, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, in compliance with the requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels/

3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S Label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door and frame manufacturers to ensure that total door opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

4. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary marking on doors’ UL or FM labels including “Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware”) provide UL/WHI or FM label on exit devices indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.

F. Substitutions: 1. All substitution requests are required to be submitted prior to the bid date and complying

with the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 01, General Requirements. Approval of submitted products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant.

G. Project’s Completion: 1. The Owner’s Representative must accompany the Architect and General Contractor

during the Door Hardware and Access Control Items punch list phase of the project close-out, insuring the Owner’s Representative is familiar with all applications and systems, as installed. Refer to additional requirements under 3.0 EXECUTION.

H. Pre-Installation Meeting: 1. Prior to door hardware installation, the General Contractor / Construction Manager must

request a hardware installation meeting to be held at the project location. This meeting must convene prior to the hardware’s installation.

2. The types of hardware this meeting must include are: locksets, exit devices, and door closers.

3. The manufacturer’s representatives of the above listed products, in conjunction with the hardware supplier for this project, must conduct the installation training.

4. All hardware installers must be required to attend this meeting to receive certificate of authorized training.


5. This meeting must serve as door openings coordination and review of all shop drawings from related trades prior to the hardware installation.

6. The Hardware Supplier must include any related meeting costs in their proposal.


A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set numbers to match the set numbers of the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the same container.

C. The door hardware supplier must deliver all individually packaged hardware items in a timely fashion to the place of installation (Shop or Project Site); direct factory shipments are not acceptable unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier must coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.

D. The General Contractor, door hardware supplier, access control supplier, and installers must count, coordinate, and store all door hardware and access control items herein, verifying complete counts of all items scheduled and furnished. The contractor must report all shortages (discrepancies with shipping documents) within five (5) working days. The manufacturers’ and Owner’s representatives will inspect the installation of the door hardware and access control items during that phase of construction. Any deficiencies in installation of all materials included herein must be corrected before installation continues.

E. The General Contractor must provide a secure lock-up for the door hardware and security equipment delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of the hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General: 1. All materials must be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a

period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of this project, unless otherwise noted. Any evidence of misuse or abuse voids all warranties. These warranties must be each manufacturers’ standard written warranty.

B. Special Warranties: 1. Continuous Geared Hinges: Life of the Door Opening 2. Mortise Latchsets and Locksets: Three (3) Year Period 3. Exit Devices: Three (3) Year Period 4. Door Closers: Ten (10) Year Period 5. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Two (2) Year Period 6. Saddle Thresholds, Bumper Thresholds, Door Sweeps, Self-Adhesive Gasketing,

Perimeter Seals, Astragal Seals, Self-Adhesive Astragal Gasketing, Mullion Seals, Interlocking Seals, and Drip Strips: Five (5) Year Period.


C. Any manufacturer whose standard written warranty does not equal or exceed the requirements listed above must provide a letter stating that they will extend their warranty to comply with the requirements of this specification.

D. All of the manufacturer’s fasteners and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be installed to maintain the manufacturer’s fire listing and/or warranty.

E. Refer to Section 01 - Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: 1. General Contractor must furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance

instructions as needed for the Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.0 BUTTS AND HINGES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Ives Bommer Stanley 5BB1 BB5000 FBB179 5BB1HW BB5004 FBB168

B. Application:

1. Provide NRP (non-removable pins) at out-swinging lockable doors.

C. Quantity:

1. Two hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high. 2. One additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof.

2.1 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES

A. Acceptable manufacturers:

Ives Stanley Select 224HD 662HD SL24HD

B. Provide electric power transfer (EPT) cutouts, or electric through-wire options as specified in hardware groups.

2.2 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUSTPROOF STRIKES

A. Acceptable manufacturers:

Ives Trimco Burns FB458 3915 590


DP2 3910 545

B. Provide automatic and manual flush bolts with forged bronze face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches in height. Top rods at manual flush bolts for doors over 90 inches in height must be increased by 6 inches for each additional 6 inches of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

2.3 LOCKSETS – CYLINDRICAL – GRADE 1

A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series:

Oak Yale Best

1CL C 5400 Series x PB 93K x 14D

B. Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with following provisions:

1. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 2. Locks must meet UL A label; to have a minimum listing for single doors 4’ x 8’. 3. Locks must have the ability to incorporate either a rigid or free-wheeling lever when in a

locked mode. 4. Levers must be bi-directional. 5. Levers must be solid. Manufacturers utilizing lever fillers are not acceptable. 6. Furnish “Knurled” or “Tactile” outside levers as indicated in the door Hardware Sets.

“Abrasive” outside levers must not be acceptable. 7. Lockset adjustment plate must be threaded for door thickness adjustment for doors 1 5/8”

to 2 1/8” thickness. The adjustment plate must have visual chassis marking for doors 1 ¾” thick.

8. Locks must have field reversible handing. 9. Latchbolt to be steel with minimum ½” throw latch; ¾” throw latch on pairs of fire rated

doors. 10. Strikes must have curved lip of sufficient length to clear trim.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES


Von Duprin Corbin Russwin Precision 98/35A Series ED5000 Apex Series

B. Provide exit device series and functions as specified in Hardware Groups. Von Duprin product numbers are referenced in the Hardware Groups.

C. All exit devices must be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors must be UL listed as "Fire Exit Hardware".

D. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lockset levers.


E. Provide lever trim with breakaway feature.

F. Provide cylinders for exit devices with locking trim.

G. Provide exit devices with stainless steel touch bars. Load bearing plastic parts are not acceptable.

H. Provide exit devices with cast metal, flush end caps.

I. Provide deadlocking latchbolt feature for exit devices.

J. Provide roller strikes on all rim exit devices.

K. Provide hex-key dogging feature for non-rated exit devices.

L. Provide keyed removable mullions, with cylinders, as specified in the Hardware Groups.

2.5 DOOR CLOSERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types of Exposed Closers:

LCN Sargent Corbin Russwin 4040XP Series 281 / 281-P10 DC6000

B. Closers must have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder.

C. Provide non-sized closers, continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force to meet opening force requirements of ANSI A117.1

D. Hydraulic regulation must be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers must have separate adjustment for latch speed, swing speed, and back check.

E. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified to have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe (“CUSH”). Parallel arm mounted closers must have “EDA” type arms or, where specified, “CUSH” or “SCUSH” type arms.

F. Surface closers must be certified to exceed ten million full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory.

G. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

H. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

I. Provide back-check for closers.

J. Provide hold-open arms where indicated, except on labeled doors.

K. Provide closers for doors as noted in Hardware Groups and, in addition, provide closers for labeled doors whether or not specifically noted in group.

L. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC 7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.

M. Pressure relief valves (PRV’s) are not permitted.


2.6 OVERHEAD STOPS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

Glynn Johnson Rixson Sargent 90 9 Series 590 Series

B. Provide overhead stops for interior doors equipped with regular arm surface type closer for doors that open against equipment, casework, sidelights, other objects that would make wall stops inappropriate.

C. Provide sex bolt attachments for mineral core door application.

2.7 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types:

Ives Trimco Door Controls WS406/407CCV 1270WVP 3211T

B. Provide WS406/407CCV Series wall stop for each door leaf unless otherwise specified, or where conditions require the use of an overhead stop.

C. Floor or base stops must be used only where definitely specified or absolutely unavoidable.

2.8 THRESHOLDS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:

Zero National Guard Reese 8655A 425 S425A 566A 896N S483A

B. Where thresholds are specified in hardware groups, provide 425E thresholds unless detailed otherwise.

C. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.

D. Where thresholds occur at openings with one or more mullions, they must be cut for the mullions and extended continuously for the entire opening.

2.9 WEATHERSTRIPPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:

Zero National Guard Reese Sweeps 39A 201NA 323C Jambs 429A 5050 755C Rain Drips 142A 16A R201C

B. Where weatherstripping is specified in hardware groups, provide 5050 unless detailed otherwise.


C. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weatherstripping being applied to hollow metal frames.

D. Where sweeps are specified in hardware groups, provide 201NA unless detailed otherwise.

E. Where rain drips are specified in hardware groups, provide 16A x full frame width, unless detailed otherwise.

2.10 GASKETING


Zero National Guard Reese 188S 5050 F-797B

B. Where smoke gasket is specified in hardware groups, provide 188S, unless detailed otherwise.

C. Provide gaskets for 20-minute doors and doors designated for smoke and draft control.

D. Where frame applied intumescent seals are required by the manufacturer, provide gaskets that comply with UBC 7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.

2.11 LATCH PROTECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and types:

Ives M.A.G. Don-Jo LG1 8851-S CLP-110-32D

B. Latch protectors must be minimum 13 gauge stainless steel of the type required to work with the specified latch.

C. Latch protectors must incorporate a security frame pin to prevent separation of the door and frame.

2.12 SILENCERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and types:

Ives Steelcraft Don-Jo SR64 Q146 1608

B. Provide grey rubber silencers featuring pneumatic design that, once installed, forms an air pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing.

C. Provide three (3) silencers per hollow metal strike jamb; two (2) per hollow metal double door head. Omit at doors scheduled to receive perimeter weatherstripping or smoke gasket.

D. Silencers must meet ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011


2.13 FASTENERS

A. Including, but not limited to, wood or machine screws, bolts, bolts, nuts, anchors, etc. of proper type, material, and finish required for installation of hardware.

B. Use phillips head for exposed screws. Do not use aluminum screws to attach hardware.

C. Provide self-tapping (TEC) screws for attachment of sweeps and stop-applied weatherstripping only.

2.14 TYPICAL FINISHES AND MATERIALS

A. Finishes, unless otherwise specified:

1. Butts: Outswinging Exterior Doors a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

2. Butts: Interior Doors and Inswinging Exterior Doors a. US26D (BHMA 652) on Steel

3. Continuous Hinges: a. US28 (BHMA 628) on Aluminum

4. Flush Bolts: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

5. Exit Devices: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

6. Locks and Latches: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

7. Push Plates, Pulls and Push Bars: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

8. Coordinators: a. USP (BHMA 600) on Steel

9. Kick Plates, Armor Plates, and Edge Guards: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

10. Overhead Stops and Holders: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

11. Closers: Surface mounted. a. Sprayed Aluminum Lacquer.

12. Latch Protectors: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

13. Miscellaneous Hardware: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and, except as otherwise indicated, by the Architect.

1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute.

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Sets units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Where scheduled, door pulls must be through-bolted with bolt heads concealed behind push plates.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds, for exterior and interior doors, in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 - Joint Sealers.

G. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

H. The hardware installer must be responsible for installation of all mechanical and electromechanical hardware items contained within this specification, in accordance with the manufacturer’s technical installation guidance, and in addition to all applicable code requirements.

I. Upon completion of the final installation of the Door Hardware and Access Control System, and burn in of the Security System, the Contract Hardware Distributor and the Access Control System’s Supplier must jointly make final adjustments to the electrified hardware and Access Control System’s openings to insure proper adjustment and function of the opening is in compliance with the system’s functionality requirements.


1. After installation has been completed, provide services of qualified hardware consultant to check Project to determine proper application of finish hardware according to schedule. Also check operation and adjustment of hardware items.

2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.


A. At final completion, hardware must be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make final adjustment to door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed.


B. Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.

D. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.

E. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide for proper protection of items of hardware until Owner accepts Project as complete.

3.6 HARDWARE GROUPS

A. The following schedule of hardware groups must be considered a guide only, and the supplier is cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the preamble to this section. It must be the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required hardware.

B. Refer to the door schedule for hardware group required at each door opening.

HARDWARE SET # 01

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 095B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99-EO 626 VON 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG1 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 566A-MSLA-10 A ZER 1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM BLK SCE

HARDWARE SET # 02

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 011 EACH TO HAVE:


QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG1 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 566A-MSLA-10 A ZER

HARDWARE SET # 03

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 095A 295 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 99-L-F-17 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1E62 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER

HARDWARE SET # 04

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 204 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA INSTITUTIONAL 9K3LCW 14C 626 BES 2 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 05

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):


002 005A 113 EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 06


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SRI 689 LCN 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 07

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 206A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 08

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 112 EACH TO HAVE:


QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM 9K3LCR 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 52A A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A-MSLA-10 A ZER

HARDWARE SET # 09


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM 9K3LCR 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP H 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 10


6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 90H 630 GLY

HARDWARE SET # 11


2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE


1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 90H 630 GLY

HARDWARE SET # 12

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 115D EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 90H 630 GLY 2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 13

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 208A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM 9K3LCR 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 2 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 14

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 003 206B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRY 9K3LCAB 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE


HARDWARE SET # 14A

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 115C EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRY 9K3LCAB 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

HARDWARE SET # 15

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 115A 115B 206 206C 207 207A EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER

HARDWARE SET # 16

FOR USE ON DOOR #(S): 207B EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM 9K3LCD 14C 626 BES 1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED 626 BES 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

GLAZING 088000 - 1


SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

a. Glazed curtain walls. b. Hollow metal borrowed lites. c. Non-fire rated hollow metal and flush wood doors. d. Glazing sealants and accessories.



1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Section 088813 "Fire-Resistant Glazing." For fire-resistant glazing in fire-rated doors.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

GLAZING 088000 - 2

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

1. Insulating glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084413 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.



A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

GLAZING 088000 - 3


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


a. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. b. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™. c. PPG Industries, Inc. d. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC. e. Viracon, Inc.

GLAZING 088000 - 4

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

GLAZING 088000 - 5

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

GLAZING 088000 - 6

D. Clear Sputter-coated float glass; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class 1 with ASTM C 1376 vacuum deposition sputtered coating on Surface No. 2 unless otherwise indicated.


a. Guardian Industries Corp.; Clear with SunGuard SNX 62/27 b. PPG Industries, Inc.; Clear with Solarban 70XL coating. c. Viracon; Clear with VNE 63

E. Tinted Sputter-coated float glass; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class 2 with ASTM C 1376 vacuum deposition sputtered coating on Surface No. 2 unless otherwise indicated.


a. Guardian Industries Corp.; Bronze with SunGuard SNX 62/27 b. PPG Industries, Inc.; Solarbronze with Solarban 70XL coating. c. Viracon; Bronze VNE 63

F. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3.

1. Glass: Clear float 2. Heat Treatment: Tempered, ASTM C 1048, Kind FT; CPSC 16CFR-1201; ANSI Z 97.1 3. Ceramic Coating Color: As Selected from Manufacturer’s Full Range of Standard

Colors.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary sealants.

2. Spacer: Plastic Hybrid Stainless Steel. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

GLAZING 088000 - 7

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Field-applied sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant as approved by glass manufacturer.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

GLAZING 088000 - 8

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

GLAZING 088000 - 9

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

GLAZING 088000 - 10

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type [MG-1]: Clear annealed float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.

B. Glass Type MG-2: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required.

3.7 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type [IG-01]: Double-Glazed Sputter-Coated Insulating Clear Vision Glass Unit.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Argon. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.24 maximum. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.21 maximum. 9. Visible Light Transmittance: 62 percent minimum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.26 maximum.

GLAZING 088000 - 11

11. Safety glazing required.

B. Glass Type [IG-02]: Double-Glazed Sputter-Coated Insulating Tinted Vision Glass Unit.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 4. Tint Color: Bronze. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on third surface. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.24 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.21 maximum. 10. Visible Light Transmittance: 37 percent minimum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.26 maximum. 12. Safety glazing required.

C. Glass Type [IG-03]: Ceramic-coated, insulating spandrel glass.

1. Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 7. Coating Location: Third surface. 8. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.45maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.48 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.31 maximum.


FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 088813 - 1


SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes fire-protection-rated vision panels in interior doors, associated accessories and miscellaneous materials.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 088000 "Glazing" for nonfire-protection-rated vision panels in interior doors and interior vision panel (borrowed lites) frames.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.




B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Passes positive pressure test standards UL10C, UBC 7-2 and UBC 7-4.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual"

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.


2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and shall comply with NFPA 80.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 deg F (250 deg C) temperature-rise limitation; and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

C. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from two plies of clear, ceramic glass; 8-mm total thickness; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


a. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions; Pyran Platinum L. b. Technical Glass Products; FireLite Plus. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.

2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 795 Silicone Building Sealant. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SilGlaze II

SCS2800. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.

C. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Install in vision panels in fire-rated doors to requirements of NFPA 80.

B. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.

C. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.


D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

H. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified.

K. Install so that appropriate UL markings remain permanently visible.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape.


G. Use specified glazing compound, without adulteration; bed glazing material in glazing compound; entirely fill all recess and spaces. Provide visible glazing compound with smooth and straight edges.


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type <FPGL-1>: 60-minute fire-protection-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation; laminated ceramic glazing.


FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1


SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


B. Section includes fixed extruded-aluminum louvers.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants to be used for louvers.

B. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal).

C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

D. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.




1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.


A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and seismic performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation


of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

C. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

F. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Sightproof, Drainable-Blade Louver <LV-01>:


a. Air Flow Company, Inc.; EA-545. b. Greenheck Fan Corporation; EHH-501. c. Ruskin Company; EME520DD

2. Louver Depth: 5 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.080 inch

for frames. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 6.99 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver. b. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when

subjected to a rainfall rate of 8 inches per hour and a wind speed of 50 mph at a core-area intake velocity of 400 fpm.

c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 700-fpm free-area exhaust velocity.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.


2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.

2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.

2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of an insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.

1. Thickness: 2 inches. 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: Polyisocyanurate foam. 4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's

standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels.

5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. 6. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. 7. Attach blank-off panels with clips.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


2.7 FABRICATION

A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.

2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where indicated.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer.

1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

3. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view , threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.


A. Finish louvers after assembly.


B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: a. Ruskin; Perledize 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.



A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.


MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL 090561.13 - 1


SECTION 090561.13 - MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and testing for the complete installation of work as specified in this section.

1. Section includes fluid-applied, resin-based, membrane-forming systems that control the moisture-vapor-emission rate of high-moisture, interior concrete to prepare it for floor covering installation.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 096813 “Tile Carpeting” for concrete substrate pre-installation moisture testing requirements for carpet tile adhesives.

B. Section 096723 “Urethane Cement Mortar Flooring System” for concrete substrate pre-installation moisture testing requirements for urethane slurry flooring system.

1.4 ALLOWANCES

A. Concrete MVE-control systems are part of Moisture Vapor Emission Control Allowance.

1.5 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by Moisture Vapor Emission Control Unit Price.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. MVE: Moisture vapor emission.

B. MVER: Moisture vapor emission rate.






B. Preinstallation testing reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Employs factory-trained personnel who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection.

B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating directions for storage and mixing with other components.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with MVE-control system manufacturer's written instructions for substrate and ambient temperatures, humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting system installation.

1. Store system components in a temperature-controlled environment and protected from weather and at ambient temperature of not less than 65 deg F and not more than 85 deg F at least 48 hours before use.

2. Maintain ambient temperature and relative humidity in installation areas within range recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F and not less than 40 or more than 60 percent relative humidity, for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3. Install MVE-control systems where concrete surface temperatures will remain a minimum of 5 deg F higher than the dew point for ambient temperature and relative humidity conditions in installation areas for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. MVE-Control System Capabilities: Capable of suppressing MVE without failure where installed on concrete that exhibits the following conditions:

1. MVER: Maximum 25 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM F 1869. 2. Relative Humidity: Maximum 100 percent when tested according to ASTM F 2170 using

in situ probes.

B. Water-Vapor Transmission: Through MVE-control system, maximum 0.09 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.

C. Tensile Bond Strength: For MVE-control system, greater than 200 psi with failure in the concrete according to ASTM D 7234.

2.2 MVE-CONTROL SYSTEM


1. Advanced Moisture Control; Vapor-Green FC. 2. KOSTER American Corporation; VAP I 2000. 3. MAPEI Corporation; Planiseal EMB.

B. MVE-Control System: ASTM F 3010-qualified, fluid-applied, two-component, epoxy-resin, membrane-forming system; formulated for application on concrete substrates to reduce MVER to level required for installation of floor coverings indicated and acceptable to manufacturers of floor covering products indicated, including adhesives.

1. Substrate Primer: Provide MVE-control system manufacturer's concrete-substrate primer if required for system indicated by substrate conditions.

2. Cementitious Underlayment Primer: If required for subsequent installation of cementitious underlayment products, provide MVE-control system manufacturer's primer to ensure adhesion of products to MVE-control system.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Patching and Leveling Material: Moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant product recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer and with minimum of 3000-psi compressive strength after 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Crack-Filling Material: Resin-based material recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer for sealing concrete substrate crack repair.

C. Cementitious Underlayment: If required to maintain manufacturer's warranty, provide MVE-control system manufacturer's hydraulic cement-based underlayment.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


1. Installation of system indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preinstallation Testing:

1. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests. a. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Install MVE-

control system in areas where pH readings exceed finished floor manufacturer’s written requirements and/or as specified in finished floor specification sections.

2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Install MVE-control system in

locations where concrete substrate MVER exceeds manufacturer’s written requirements and/or as specified in finished floor specification sections.

b. Internal Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Install MVE-control system in locations where concrete substrates exhibit relative humidity level greater than manufacturer’s written requirements and/or as specified in finished floor specification sections.

3. Tensile-Bond-Strength Testing: For typical locations indicated to receive installation of MVE-control system, install minimum 100-sq. ft. area of MVE-control system to prepared concrete substrate and test according to ASTM D 7234.

a. Proceed with installation only where tensile bond strength is greater than 200 psi with failure in the concrete.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare and clean substrates according to MVE-control system manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of system to concrete.

1. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with MVE-control system and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

2. Provide concrete surface profile complying with ICRI 310.2R CSP 3 by shot blasting using apparatus that abrades the concrete surface with shot, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

3. After shot blasting, repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to MVE-control system manufacturer's written instructions.


4. Protect substrate voids and joints to prevent resins from flowing into or leaking through them.

5. Fill surface depressions and irregularities with patching and leveling material. 6. Fill surface cracks, grooves, control joints, and other nonmoving joints with crack-filling

material. 7. Allow concrete to dry, undisturbed, for period recommended in writing by MVE-control

system manufacturer after surface preparation, but not less than 24 hours. 8. Before installing MVE-control systems, broom sweep and vacuum prepared concrete.

C. Protect walls, floor openings, electrical openings, door frames, and other obstructions during installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install MVE-control system according to ASTM F 3010 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic surface free of surface deficiencies such as pin holes, fish eyes, and voids.

1. Install primers as required to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not apply MVE-control system across substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints.

C. Apply system, including component coats if any, in thickness recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer for MVER indicated by preinstallation testing.

D. Cure MVE-control system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination or other damage during installation and curing processes.

E. After curing, examine MVE-control system for surface deficiencies. Repair surface deficiencies according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install cementitious underlayment over cured membrane if required to maintain manufacturer's warranty and in thickness required to maintain the warranty.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform installation inspections.

B. Installation Inspections: Inspect substrate preparation and installation of system components to ensure compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and to ensure that a complete MVE-control system is installed without deficiencies.

1. Verify that surface preparation meets requirements. 2. Verify that component coats and complete MVE-control-system film thicknesses comply

with manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Verify that MVE-control-system components and installation areas that evidence

deficiencies are repaired according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. MVE-control system will be considered defective if it does not pass inspections.


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect MVE-control system from damage, wear, dirt, dust, and other contaminants before floor covering installation. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary coverings, recommended in writing by MVE-control system manufacturer.

B. Do not allow subsequent preinstallation examination and testing for floor covering installation to damage, puncture, or otherwise compromise the MVE-control system membrane.


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1


SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior non-load-bearing wall studs.


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:

a. Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.

b. Vertical deflection at headers 1/360 or as required by manufacturer of opening.




A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.


B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on a minimum horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. Where walls are subject to increased horizontal loading adjust as required.

D. Vertical Deflection: For opening header members within wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the span.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or embossed steel studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:


1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 5) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 6) Telling Industries.


b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection.

c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Embossed Steel Studs and Runners:


1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) Marino\WARE. 4) MBA Building Supplies. 5) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 7) Telling Industries.

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements.

c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical movement.


1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) Fire Trak Corp. 4) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 5) Super Stud Building Products Inc.

2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

a. Laterally brace studs with continuous strap or cold-rolled channels as required. 3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

a. Where deflection may be great evaluate the lateral stability of the outer-runner flanges and consider using steel channels for tracks instead of non-structural runners.


4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


1) Blazeframe Industries. 2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 4) MBA Building Supplies. 5) Metal-Lite. 6) Perfect Wall, Inc. 7) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 8) Telling Industries.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


a. Blazeframe Industries. b. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. c. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. d. Fire Trak Corp. e. Metal-Lite. f. Perfect Wall, Inc. g. Steel Network, Inc. (The).

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.035 inch.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.


b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United State Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.


C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.


a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.


D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1


SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes interior gypsum board.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.

B. Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders" for vapor retarders in interior wall assemblies.

C. Section 079219 “Acoustical Joint Sealants” for acoustical sealants in sound resistant wall assemblies.

D. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-loadbearing steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

E. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.






A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. b. National Gypsum Company. c. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.


3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. b. National Gypsum Company. c. United States Gypsum Company.


3. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.


a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc® IR Type X Wallboard. b. National Gypsum Company; Hi-Impact Brand XP Fire-Shield Wallboard. c. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific; Comfort Guard IR. d. United States Gypsum Company; USG Sheetrock® Brand Mold Tough® VHI

(Very High Impact) Firecode® Core.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

3. Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements. 4. Surface Indentation: Meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 5. Single-Drop Soft-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 6. Hard-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements according to test in

Annex A1. 7. Long Edges: Tapered. 8. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.


a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Wallboard. b. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific; Comfort Guard Mold

Resistant Wallboard. c. United States Gypsum Company; USG Sheetrock® Brand Mold Tough® Gypsum

Panels.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.


2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or

high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

D. Joint Compound for Mold-resistant Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use mold resistant setting-type taping compound.

a. Use mold resistant setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use mold resistant drying-type, all-purpose compound.


4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use mold resistant drying-type, all-purpose compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 “Acoustical Joint Sealants”

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.


D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Impact-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Skim-Coated Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.


a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.


C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1


SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section Includes glazed wall tile, and tile backing panels.



1.3 RELATED WORK

1. Section 071416 "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing on exterior of building.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.




B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer has a minimum five years’ experience in similar projects.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Stone thresholds. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Cementitious backer units. 4. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.


2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type <CT-1>, <CT-2>: Glazed wall tile.


a. Daltile; Semi-Gloss. b. MidAmerica Tile; C&D Series. c. Virginia Tile; Expression.

2. Module Size: 3 by 6 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. 5. Finish: Semi-Gloss / Gloss glaze.

6. Tile Color and Pattern:

a. <CT-01> 1) Daltile: Semi-Gloss K101 White 2) MidAmerica Tile: Arctic White Bright Gloss 3) Virginia Tile: Expression Daylight Gloss

b. <CT-02> 1) Daltile: Semi-Gloss K111 Black 2) MidAmerica Tile: Black Bright Gloss 3) Virginia Tile: Midnight Gloss

7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with

radius of at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. United States Gypsum Company; DUROCK Cement Board.



2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.


a. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh. c. Merkrete by Parex USA, Inc.; Hydro-Guard 2000.

2.6 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15.


a. Custom Building Products; Versabond Flex. b. MAPEI Corporation; Kerabond/Keralastic™ System. c. Merkrete by Parex USA, Inc.; 700 Premium Set.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site.

4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.


a. Custom Building Products: CEG-IG b. MAPEI Corporation; Kerapoxy CQ c. Merkrete by Parex USA, Inc.; Pro Epoxy

2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.



A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA


installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/8 inch.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

3.3 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.

3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.



A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board over vapor-retarder membrane.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: <CT-1, CT-2>. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.


ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1


SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 2. Concealed suspension systems.



B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6-inches-in size.



A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.


2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES <ACT-01>


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Ultima Health Zone 2. CertainTeed Corporation; Performa Rx Symphony 3. United States Gypsum Company; Mars Healthcare Acoustical Panels

B. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type IV, Form 2. 2. Pattern: E. 3. Fire Classification: Fire Class A

C. Color: White

D. LR: Not less than 0.86.

E. CAC: Not less than 25.

F. NRC: Not less than 0.70

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Minimum Thickness: 3/4 inch.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.

J. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

K. Humidity/Sag Resistance: Provide acoustical tiles capable of of maintaining superior sag resistance and is recommended by the Manufacturer for areas subject to high humidity.

L. Required Certifications: Provide acoustical tiles meeting USDA and FSIS guidelines for use in food processing areas.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.


1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Provide Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition in wet environments and where ceilings are to be subjected to pressure washing.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM <CS-01>


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed. 3. United States Gypsum Company.

4. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 5. Access: Upward and end pivoted or side pivoted, with initial access openings of size

indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles.

a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 24 inches.


2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."


B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.

1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile.


2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1


SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES:


1. Section includes resilient base and molding including accessories and miscellaneous materials.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in pdf format.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient products.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.



A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products for 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Furnish not less 10 linear feet of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE: <RB-1>

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: a. Mannington Commercial b. Roppe Corporation, USA. c. Johnsonite

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: ype TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Standard toe (cove) base (5/8”).

C. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.


H. Colors and Patterns. 1. Mannington: 904 Bark 2. Roppe: Black Brown 193 3. Johnsonite: Burnt Umber 63

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Mannington Commercial. b. Roppe Corporation, USA. c. Johnsonite

B. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering joiner for tile and carpet transition strips.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.


URETHANE CEMENT MORTAR FLOORING SYSTEM 096723 - 1


SECTION 096723 – URETHANE CEMENT MORTAR FLOORING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes surface preparation and the application of urethane slurry floor coating systems on the following substrates:

a. Interior Substrates

1) Concrete, Horizontal surfaces



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 096723.02 “Epoxy Cement Mortar Systems” for epoxy slurry flooring systems on interior horizontal concrete substrates and associated integral cove base.

B. Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for general field painting.

C. Section 099610 “Polyurethane Abrasion Resistant Floor Coating System” for polyurethane abrasion resistant floor coating systems on interior horizontal concrete substrates.



1. Scheduling: Meeting shall be scheduled after pre-installation testing per Manufacturer’s written instructions has been completed and results are available for review.

2. Participants:

a. General Prime, Installer, and Manufacturer’s Representative.


3. Review installation procedures, environmental conditions for application, testing and inspection procedures, surface preparation, joint treatment, special details, and protection and repairs.

4. Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide a written report to the A/E and Owner’s Representative within (5) working days of the visit outlining the following:

a. Any deficiencies in substrates noted including subsequent corrective measures by installer.

b. Verification that a full warranty will be provided by the manufacturer based on findings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.

B. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.


A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.


A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.



B. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 96-inch-square floor area selected by Architect.

a. Include 96-inch length of integral cove base with inside and outside corner.

2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's review of mockups. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.




A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application.

B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.

C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flammability: Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from manufacturer recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.

2.3 RESINOUS FLOORING <RF-01>, <RF-02>

A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base.


a. Duraflex, Inc.; Poly-Crete MDB (self-leveling broadcast quartz), Urethane topcoat seamless flooring system.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company, General Polymers; FasTop 12S Urethane Slurry Flooring System.


c. Stonhard, Inc.; Stonclad UT Polyurethane Mortar System.

B. System Characteristics:

1. Color and Pattern: a. <RF-01>

1) Duraflex, Inc.; Grey 2) Sherwin-Williams Company, General Polymers; Silver Gray 3) Stonhard, Inc; Silver Gray

b. <RF-02>

1) Duraflex, Inc.; Red 2) Sherwin-Williams Company, General Polymers; Classic Tile Red 3) Stonhard, Inc; Brick Red

2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance. 3. Overall System Thickness: 1/4 inch. 4. Federal Agency Approvals: USDA approved for food-processing environments.

C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated.

D. Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated and that inhibits substrate cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring.

1. Formulation Description: High solids.

a. Provide fiberglass scrim embedded in reinforcing membrane.

E. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

F. Body Coats:

1. Resin: Urethane. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Pigmented. 4. Application Method: Self-leveling slurry with broadcast aggregates, or troweled/

screeded. 5. Number of Coats: One. 6. Thickness of Coats: 1/4 inch. 7. Aggregates: Colored quartz (ceramic-coated silica).

G. Topcoats: Sealing or finish coats.

1. Resin: Urethane. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Pigmented. 4. Number of Coats: One.


5. Thickness of Coats: 8-10 mils. 6. Finish: Low Gloss.

H. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated: 1. Abrasion Resistance: 0.08 gm maximum weight loss according to ASTM D 4060. 2. Hardness: 75, Shore D according to ASTM D 2240. 3. Impact Resistance: >160 in. lbs. per ASTM D 4226. 4. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi after 7 days minimum according to ASTM C 579. 5. Tensile Strength: 550 psi minimum according to ASTM C 307. 6. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 2,400 psi minimum according to ASTM C 580. 7. Adhesion: 300 psi concrete failure per ACI 503R. 8. Water Absorption: 0.056% percent maximum according to ASTM C 413. 9. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 1.1 x 10-5 in/in oC mm per ASTM C 531.. 10. Coefficient of Friction: >0.80 per ASTM D 2047. 11. Critical Radiant Flux: >1.0 per ASTM E 648. 12. Smoke Density: 287-346 per ASTM E 662. 13. Flammability: Self-extinguishing per ASTM D 635. 14. Service Temperature: -50F – 300F 15. Bond Strength: 400 psi, 100 percent concrete failure per ACI 503R. 16. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater according to NFPA 253.

I. System Chemical Resistance: Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system are unaffected when tested according to ASTM D 1308 for 50 percent immersion in the following reagents for no fewer than seven days:

1. Alcohol 2. Ethylene Glycol 3. Fats, Oils & Sugars 4. Gasoline, Diesel & Kerosene 5. Hydrochloric Acid (<35%) 6. Lactic Acid (Milk) 7. Mineral Oils 8. Most Organic Solvents 9. Muriatic Acid 10. Nitric Acid (<10%) 11. Nitric Acid (<30%) 12. PM Acetate 13. Phosphoric Acid (50%) 14. Potassium Hydroxide (<50%) 15. Sodium Hydroxide (<50%) 16. Sulfuric Acid (<50%) 17. Water 18. Xylene

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.


B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.

1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:

a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup.

b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent.

2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Relative Humidity Test: Use in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a relative humidity level measurement as noted acceptable by resinous floor manufacturer.

4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing.

C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.

2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

3. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Reinforcing Membrane: Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.


D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details, including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.

1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high.

E. Self-Leveling Body Coats (If applicable): Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.

1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.

F. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats (If applicable): Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer.

G. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated.


A. Manufacturer’s Representative:

1. After attending Mockup/Pre-installation meeting, provide (1) additional site visit during construction.

2. Provide a written report to the A/E and Owner’s Representative within (5) working days of each visit outlining the following: a. Overall adherence of installation to manufacturer’s warranty, installation and

performance requirements. b. Any deficiencies noted including subsequent corrective measures by installer. c. Verify that the installed thickness of each product meets the specified

performance/tolerance/fire requirements. d. Verification that a full warranty will be provided by the manufacturer based on

findings.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.


TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1


SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes modular carpet tile including accessories and miscellaneous materials.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 090561.13 “Moisture Vapor Emission Control” for concrete substrate pre-installation moisture testing requirements for carpet tile adhesives.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in pdf format.

B. Product Data: For each product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 2. Pattern of installation. 3. Insets and borders. 4. Edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 5. Transition details to other flooring materials.

D. Samples: For each color and texture required.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

E. Product Data:


1. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program.

2. For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content.

F. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

G. Maintenance data.

1.5 INSTALLATION QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Flooring contractor to be specialty contractor normally engaged in this type of work and shall have three (3) years minimum documented experience in the installation of these materials and participation in manufacturer’s environmental program including responsible carpet removal, recycling and installation.

B. Flooring contractor and his/her sub-contractors must be approved by the architect and/or the carpet manufacturer.

C. Flooring contractor will be responsible for the proper product installation, including floor preparation in all the areas indicated in the drawings to receive carpet. The carpet installation standard will be as listed in The Carpet and Rug Institute’s Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet CRI-104, the standard that establishes the minimum installation procedures.

D. Flooring manufacturer to provide owner a written warranty that guarantees the completed installation to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of no less than two (2) years after job completion.

E. Carpet manufacturer to provide field service experts to assist in project start-up as required by the job. Manufacturer will notify owner, architect, general prime contractor or another designated contact in any installation instructions is not followed.

F. Qualifications of Installers: All work shall be done by installation firms specializing in commercial carpet installation. It is required, that the firm shall be a member of the Floor Covering Installation Contractors Association (FCICA) and/or certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB).

G. Waste Reduction: All polyethylene roll wrap shall be collected and recycled.


A. Deliver all materials to installation site in the manufacturer’s original packaging. Packaging to contain manufacturer’s name, identification number and related information.

B. Product to be delivered as required by manufacturer.

C. All materials are to be delivered (24 hours) before the start of installation and stored in (above 65 degrees F and below 95 degrees F), dry location, safe from damage and soiling.

D. Delivered and stored materials must be available for inspection as required by owner, architect, general contractor and/or the manufacturer.



A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."

B. Substrate Conditions: Use the current test methods described below to determine the dryness as required to ensure initial and long-term success: 1. Comply with ASTM F2170 testing procedures. 2. Comply with ASTM F1869 testing procedures (see #4 below). 3. Engage a third party testing agent to conduct in-site relative humidity testing (ASTM

F2170) or anhydrous calcium chloride testing (ASTM F1869), whichever is recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Perform minimum of 3 tests for the first 1000 square feet and at least one test for each additional 1000 square feet, to ensure concrete internal relative humidity does not exceed 85% or moisture vapor emissions do not exceed 10.0 lb per square feet within a 24 hour period, depending on resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Only use the ASTM F 1869, anhydrous calcium chloride test of vapor emission if recommended by the flooring manufacturer, otherwise, ASTM F 2170 should be used.

5. Contingency for high moisture readings: if at the time of testing the moisture readings are in excess of 85% internal relative humidity or 10.0 lb moisture vapor emissions, the Architect will direct the testing service to initiate a petrographic analysis to determine the water/cement ratio and if sufficient hydration has taken place. If the specifications were not followed in their entirety, water/cement ratio (as specified), and/or the concrete surface has been inadequately hydrated, the Contractor responsible for the placement of the cement shall be responsible for the costs associated with the petrographic analysis and subsequent remediation requirements.

C. The flooring contractor shall verify in writing to the Owner, a minimum of thirty (30) days prior to scheduled resilient flooring installation, the following substrate conditions: 1. Moisture: Maximum of 85% internal relative humidity tested in accordance with the

current ASTM F2170 or maximum of 10.0 lb moisture vapor emission rate tested in accordance with the current ASTM F1869.

2. Alkalinity (ASTM F710): Minimum 7.0 pH and Maximum 10.0 pH. 3. Suitability of Substrate Surface: Ensure that substrate surface is sound, smooth and flat to

1/8 inch in 10 feet. It is the Flooring Contractor’s responsibility to meet this 1/8” in 10 feet requirement.

4. Letter of Certification from adhesive manufacturer and moisture remediation sealer manufacturer that both products are compatible with one another.

D. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Carpet installation shall not commence until painting and finishing work is complete and ceiling and overhead work is tested, approved and completed.

E. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranties must be the standard, printed warranties on the carpet manufacturer’s letterhead. All warranty items to be full term, not pro-rated for the indicated period. All warranties must be issued by the manufacturer as standard published warranties on all types of carpet within this document. If the product fails to perform as warranted when properly installed and maintained according to procedures, the affected area will be repaired or replaced at the expense of the manufacturer. The carpet manufacturer will provide standard published written performance warranties for the following:

1. Lifetime warranty against excessive surface wear. Excessive wear means no more than 10% loss of pile fiber weight measured before and after use as tested under ASTM D-3936.

2. Lifetime static protection, meaning built-in protection below 3.0 kv as tested under AATCC-134

B. The Carpet manufacturer shall warrant carpet manufactured with Nexus Modular backing for the useful life of the original installation against product failure from: 1. Tuft Bind (edge ravel, yarn pulls, zippering) 2. Delamination 3. Lifetime Moisture Barrier 4. Lifetime Dimensional Stability

C. All warranties to be sole source responsibility of the carpet manufacturer. Second source warranties that involve parties other than the carpet manufacturer are unacceptable.

D. Warranties shall not be written only for this purchase or purchaser and shall be standard issue nationally official documents.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide five percent (5%) extra material for shelf stock of carpeting of each color and type specified. Deliver as requested to owner’s storage. Recycle waste and unusable scrap through manufacturer’s environmental program.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE: <CPT-01>

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Mohawk Group; Street Thread 2. Mannington Mills, Inc; Sylvan Structures I 3. Tandus – Centiva, A Tarkett Company; Angulate 04655

B. Size: 24” x 24”.

C. Color & Pattern: 1. Mohawk Group – Street Thread, Off The Wall, 379 Mod


2. Mannington Mills, Inc; Sylvan Structures I, Rustic 8503 3. Tandus – Centiva, A Tarkett Company; Angulate 04655 Firestarter 22103 4. Tanuds – Centiva, A Tarkett Company; Angulate 04655 Dusk Gaze 22108

D. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

1. Certified test reports shall be submitted by the carpet manufacturer, for all performance assurance specifications listed below. All submitted test numbers should represent average for standard production goods.

2. Required Test Reports:

a. Pill Test/ DOC-FF-1-70 (ASTM D-2589) – Requirement: Pass b. Flooring Radiant Panel / ASTM E-648 – Requirement: Pass c. CRI VOC Chamber Test/Indoor Air Quality test (CRI-IAQ) Green Label Plus Test d. Lightfastness: Rating of not less than 5 on International Grey Scale after 40 SFU’s

when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 16E. e. Crockfastness: Minimum stain rating on International Grey Scale of not less than 5

wet or dry when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 165. f. Atmospheric Fading: Burned Gas shall not be less than 5 on International Grey

Scale after two cycles on each test as per AATCC Test Method 129 Ozone and AATCC Test Method 23.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Basis of Design: Carpet Tile Manufacturer recommended adhesive or comparable product that meet the specification for Adhesives below.

B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Carpet Tile Manufacturer recommended adhesive or comparable product that meet the specifications for Adhesives below.

D. Substrate Conditions: Use the current test methods described below to determine the dryness as required to ensure initial and long-term success: 1. Comply with ASTM F2170 testing procedures. 2. Comply with ASTM F1869 testing procedures (see #4 below). 3. Engage a third party testing agent to conduct in-site relative humidity testing (ASTM

F2170) or anhydrous calcium chloride testing (ASTM F1869), whichever is recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Perform minimum of 3 tests for the first 1000 square feet and at least one test for each additional 1000 square feet, to ensure concrete internal relative humidity does not exceed 85% or moisture vapor emissions do not exceed 10.0 lb per square feet within a 24 hour period, depending on resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommendations.


4. Only use the ASTM F 1869, anhydrous calcium chloride test of vapor emission if recommended by the flooring manufacturer, otherwise, ASTM F 2170 should be used.

5. Contingency for high moisture readings: if at the time of testing the moisture readings are in excess of 85% internal relative humidity or 10.0 lb moisture vapor emissions, the Architect will direct the third party testing service to initiate a petrographic analysis to determine the water/cement ratio and if sufficient hydration has taken place. If the specifications were not followed in their entirety, water/cement ratio (as specified), and/or the concrete surface has been inadequately hydrated, the Contractor responsible for the placement of the cement shall be responsible for the costs associated with the petrographic analysis and subsequent remediation requirements.

E. The flooring contractor shall verify in writing to the Owner, a minimum of thirty (30) days prior to scheduled resilient flooring installation, the following substrate conditions: 1. Moisture: Maximum of 85% internal relative humidity tested in accordance with the

current ASTM F2170 or maximum of 10.0 lb moisture vapor emission rate tested in accordance with the current ASTM F1869.

2. Alkalinity (ASTM F710): Minimum 7.0 pH and Maximum 10.0 pH. 3. Suitability of Substrate Surface: Ensure that substrate surface is sound, smooth and flat to

1/8 inch in 10 feet. It is the Flooring Contractor’s responsibility to meet this 1/8” in 10 feet requirement.

4. Letter of Certification from adhesive manufacturer and moisture remediation sealer manufacturer that both products are compatible with one another.

5. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

6. Maximum Relative Humidity or Maximum Moisture Vapor Emissions Limit without further remediation (either test per manufacturer’s recommendation): a. 85% Relative Humidity (ASTM F2170). b. 10.0 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period (ASTM F 1869).

7. Alkalinity: Alkalinity should not exceed 10.0 pH (ASTM F 710).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, moisture vapor emission rate, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.


2. Allowable Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level or slope indicated when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

1. Moisture Testing: Engage a third party testing agency to perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform relative humidity test using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 85% relative humidity level measurement. If moisture exceeds 85% relative humidity rate, initiate contingency for high moisture readings below. Comply with Section 090561.13 Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission (MVE) control systems.

b. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869 for vapor emission, only if specified by flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum of 10 lb moisture-vapor-emission rate. If moisture exceeds the 10 lb moisture-vapor-emission rate, initiate contingency for high moisture readings below. Comply with Section 090561.13 Concrete Moisture Vapor Emission (MVE) control systems.

c. Contingency for high moisture readings: if at the time of testing the moisture readings are in excess of 10 lb moisture vapor emissions or 85% relative humidity, the Architect will direct the third party testing service to initiate a petrographic analysis to determine the water/cement ratio and if sufficient hydration has taken place. If the specifications were not followed in their entirety, water/cement ratio (as specified), and/or the concrete surface has been inadequately hydrated, the Contractor responsible for the placement of the cement shall be responsible for the costs associated with the petrographic analysis and subsequent remediation requirements.

d. If moisture related failure occurs, the Relative Humidity Test, ASTM F 2170, results will be the qualifying standard.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Pattern installation: Verify with Architect.

H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1


SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

a. Galvanized metal.



B. Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for special-use coatings.

C. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.



A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. M.A.B. Paints. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.


D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:


a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.


INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1


SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

a. Concrete. b. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). c. Steel and iron. d. Galvanized metal. e. Gypsum board.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.




1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.





A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. M.A.B. Paints. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits meeting federal guidelines.

D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.


1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit.


g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

h. Other items as directed by Architect.

2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 3.1M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.For a Premium Grade system, "MPI Manual" requires intermediate coat; delete first "Intermediate Coat" Subparagraph below for a Budget Grade system.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.

B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:


1. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System MPI INT 3.2G:

a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.

C. CMU Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 4.2E:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.



D. Steel Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107.


c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.3N:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.


c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.




HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1


SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Exterior Substrates:

a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces. b. Urethane roofing.

2. Interior Substrates:

a. Concrete, vertical surfaces. b. Concrete, horizontal surfaces c. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). d. Gypsum board.

1.3 RELATED WORK:

A. Section 075600.11 “Fluid-Applied Roofing, Concrete Deck.”

B. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for general field painting.

C. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for general field painting.


A. Material Compatibility: Provide coating materials that are compatible with urethane waterproofing specified in 075600.11 “Fluid-Applied Roofing, Concrete Deck” as demonstrated by coating manufacturer based testing and field experience.


1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Provide manufacturer’s written certificate confirming that application of the high-build acrylic coating specified in this section and associated preparation recommended by the manufacturer is compatible with the specified urethane roofing system and the full coating warranty will be maintained.



1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.






A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 80 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. BASF 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Exterior High-Performance Coating Schedule or Interior High-Performance Coating Schedule for the coating category indicated.

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

B. Colors: As indicated in color schedule and as noted in drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.


1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1500 to 4000 psi at 6 to 12 inches.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 100 to 600 psi at 6 to 12 inches.

F. Urethane Roofing Substrates: Coordinate required surface prep with urethane coating manufacturer so as to not void warranty. Prep surface as required to provide coating warranty.


1. Testing: Following surface preparation, perform manufacturer recommended testing to verify substrate is adequately prepared to receive high build acrylic coating in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with

coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.


C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:

1. Pigmented, high build, acrylic waterproof sealer:

a. Prime Coat: If required by manufacturer. b. Topcoat: Pigmented, high build, acrylic waterproof sealer c. Performance Requirements

1) Wind Driven Rain as tested per ASTM D6904-03 E514: Pass 2) Water Vapor Permeance: 3.43 perms min. 3) Efflorescence Resistance as tested per ASTM D7072-04: 4 4) Flexibility (20 mils P234) as tested per ASTM D522-93A: Passes ½”

Mandrel 5) Low Temperature Flexibility (20 mils P234) as tested per ASTM D522-

93A: Passes 1” Mandrel 6) Fungal/Algae Growth as tested per ASTM D3274-95: 0 7) Freeze-Thaw Resistance as tested per ASTM D714-02: Pass 8) Fixed Alignment Adhesion P540 as tested per ASTM D4541-02: 133 psi

B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces:

1. Pigmented, high build, acrylic waterproof sealer:

a. Prime Coat: If required by manufacturer. b. Topcoat: Pigmented, high build, acrylic waterproof sealer c. Performance Requirements

1) Intended for horizontal application 2) Compatible with urethane membrane indicated in drawings. 3) Wind Driven Rain as tested per ASTM D6904-03 E514: Pass 4) Water Vapor Permeance: 3.43 perms min. 5) Efflorescence Resistance as tested per ASTM D7072-04: 4 6) Flexibility (20 mils P234) as tested per ASTM D522-93A: Passes ½”

Mandrel 7) Low Temperature Flexibility (20 mils P234) as tested per ASTM D522-

93A: Passes 1” Mandrel 8) Fungal/Algae Growth as tested per ASTM D3274-95: 0 9) Freeze-Thaw Resistance as tested per ASTM D714-02: Pass 10) Fixed Alignment Adhesion P540 as tested per ASTM D4541-02: 133 psi


3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:

1. Epoxy System MPI INT 3.1F:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces: 1. Two part, Pigmented, Urethane/Epoxy system <RS-3>

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat b. Topcoat: Urethane, gloss c. Performance Requirements

1) Intended for horizontal application 2) Abrasion Resistance: 30 mgs maximum loss according to ASTM D 4060. 3) Tensile Strength: 3,200 psi minimum according to ASTM D 638. 4) Adhesion: 350 psi concrete failure per ACI 503R. 5) Flammability: Self-extinguishing per ASTM D 635

C. CMU Substrates:

1. Epoxy System MPI INT 4.2F:

a. Block Filler: Block filler, epoxy, MPI #116. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

D. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Epoxy System MPI INT 9.2E:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.


FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS 102239.13 - 1


SECTION 102239.13 - FOLDING GLASS-PANEL PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes manually operated, glass-panel partitions.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. STC: Sound Transmission Class.



B. Shop Drawings: For operable glass-panel partitions.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements

for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches long. 2. Glass: Units 12 inches square.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable glass-panel partitions.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.



A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Sprinklers.

4. Plenum acoustical barriers.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable glass-panel partitions, tracks, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Include seismic capacity of partition assemblies to remain in vertical position during a seismic event and the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on analysis, testing, or experience data, according to ASCE/SEI 7.

2. Detailed description of partition anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable glass-panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Panel finish and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components.




A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable glass-panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Faulty operation of operable glass-panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic bracing of tracks to structure above.

B. Seismic Performance: Operable glass-panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the partition panels will remain in place without separation of any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable glass-panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable glass-panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

2.2 OPERABLE GLASS PANELS

A. Operable Glass Panels: Frameless aluminum glass-panel partition system, including panels, seals, suspension system, operators, and accessories.


a. Dorma. b. Modernfold, Inc. c. Nana Wall Systems, Inc.

B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, continuously hinged panels.

C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with


tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

1. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze operable glass panels in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Glass and Glazing:

1. Safety Glass Standard for Partition Panels: Provide glass products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, Category II, or ANSI Z97.1, Class A.

2. Glass: Manufacturer's standard safety glass and glass assemblies as indicated and complying with the following:

a. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 1 (clear-low iron), Quality-Q3.

b. Glass Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for indicated requirements. c. Glass Vertical Edge: Polished.

3. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces acoustical seal.

E. Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass-panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

1. Panel Width: As indicated.

F. STC: Not less than 36.

G. Panel Frame Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type

of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.

a. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum.

H. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

I. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable glass-panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.

1. Hinges: Concealed (invisible). 2. Jamb Lock: Key actuated.

J. Panel Frame Finishes:

1. Exposed Metal:

a. Aluminum: Clear anodized.


2.3 SEALS

A. General: Provide seals that produce operable glass-panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard seals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels

and between operable glass-panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable glass-panel partition is extended and closed.

2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, or adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable glass-panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable glass-panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.

1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish.

2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance;

B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

C. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 directional finish, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware and acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware. 1. Rim Lock: Deadlock to receive cylinder, to secure storage pocket door in closed position.

See Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for lock cylinder and keying requirements.

B. Vertical Edge Trim: Manufacturer's standard transparent trim to protect vertical edges of glass in frameless panels.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine countertop, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable glass-panel partitions.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable glass-panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install operable glass-panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.

F. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable glass-panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.

C. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable glass-panel partitions.


WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1


SECTION 102600 - WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes corner guards.



1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 087100 "Door Hardware” for metal and plastic protective trim units, according to BHMA A156.6, used for armor, kick, mop, and push plates.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of handrail.


B. Material Certificates: For each type of exposed plastic material.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance.



1. Mounting and Accessory Components: Amounts proportional to the quantities of extra materials. Package mounting and accessory components with each extra material.


A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products of each type from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards <CG-01>: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.


a. InPro Corporation (IPC); Stainless Corner Guard (Surface Mount). b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group; CGSS

and CGSH Stainless Steel Corner Guard. c. WallGuard.com; Defender Series 2330.1

2. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, Type 304.

a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch. b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.

3. Wing Size: Nominal 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches. 4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch. 5. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.


2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.


FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1


SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.



B. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

1. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET <FEC-1>

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.


I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting door pull and cam lock. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim permitting door to open

180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Decals. 3) Lettering Color: White. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. b. Color: Red.

2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 6 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.


1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.


A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:

1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.


2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1


SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Base Bid: Unless noted otherwise, the General Prime Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for the complete installation of work as specified in this section

1. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers

1.2 RELATED WORK


B. Food service equipment drawings and specifications for Type K extinguishers.

C. Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."

D. Section 114000 "Food Service Equipment" for fire-extinguishing systems provided as part of commercial-kitchen exhaust hoods.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.


a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International. b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Valves: Brass. 3. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.


B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container <FE-1>: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS <FEB-1>

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.


a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International. b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.


METAL LOCKERS 105113 - 1


SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


1. Section includes heavy duty lockers.




A. Product Data: For each type of metal locker.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker.

B. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show locker trim and accessories.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available.

D. Product Schedule: For lockers. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:

a. Hooks.


A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of new lockers with existing locker configuration.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases for metal lockers.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 3. Warranty Period for Welded Metal Lockers: Lifetime from date of Substantial

Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories from single source from single locker manufacturer.

1. Obtain locks from single lock manufacturer.


A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.

2.3 HEAVY-DUTY METAL LOCKERS


1. List Industries Inc.; Marquis Protector. 2. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; All-Welded. 3. Penco Products, Inc; All-Welded.

B. Locker Arrangement: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges.

1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors.

2. Door Style: Vented panel as follows:

a. Louvered Vents: No fewer than three louver openings at top and bottom for double-tier lockers.

D. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:

1. Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 0.060-inch nominal thickness. 2. Backs: 0.048-inch nominal thickness. 3. Shelves: 0.060-inch nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides

and back.

E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames.


F. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees.

1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.

G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.

1. Single-Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook with steel padlock loop that projects through recessed cup and is finished to match metal locker body.

a. Latch Hook: Equip each door with one latch hook, fabricated from 0.120-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded midway up full-height door strike; with resilient silencer.

H. Locks: Combination padlocks.

I. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

J. Coat Rods: Manufacturer's standard.

K. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet, with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees.

1. Closures: Vertical-end type.

L. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.

M. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

N. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

1. Color: To match existing adjacent lockers.

2.4 LOCKS

A. Combination Padlocks: Provided by Owner.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.


2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation.

B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment: 1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks. 2. Coat Rods: For each compartment of each locker.

D. Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams, and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds flush.

E. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48

inches above the floor.

F. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.

G. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers.

H. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.

I. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.

B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.

1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance.

2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top of lockers and to floor. 3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.

B. Welded Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on face frames.

C. Equipment:

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.

D. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. 2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on

Drawings. 3. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 4. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of

nonrecessed metal lockers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding.


3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction.

B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
